Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 312

MicroStar® Digital MicroWave Radios

®
MicroStar

7/8/13/15/18 GHz,
Type-II IDU

Instruction Manual

P/N IMN-902220-E05
0'&

'HFODUDWLRQRI&RQIRUPLW\WRWKH
5 77('LUHFWLYH (& 

We, the undersigned,

HARRIS CORPORATION – Microwave Communications Division


3 Hotel de Ville, Dollard-des-Ormeaux, Quebec H9B 3G4 CANADA
Phone: 1 (514) 421-8400 | Fax: 1 (514) 421-3756

Certify and declare under our sole responsibility that the MicroStar® M 7/8GHz 4/8/16E1 and E3 + 2E1 and the
MicroStar® H 7/8GHz 8/16E1 and E3 + 2E1, when used for its intended purpose, complies with:
The essential requirements for protection of the health and the safety of the user and
any other person, as included in the following:
Directive: Low Voltage Directive 73/23/CEE, modified by 93/68/CEE
Standard: EN 60950 - Third edition of April 1999
The protection requirements with respect to electromagnetic compatibility, as included
in the following:
Directive: Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/CEE, modified by 92/31/CEE and 93/68/CEE
Standards: ETSI EN 301 489-1 and ETSI EN 301 489-4 of August 2000
The essential radio test suite that verifies the effective use of the frequency allocation
to terrestrial radio communication so that to avoid harmful interference.
Standards: ETSI EN 301 751 of December 2000 and ETSI EN 301 216 of July 2001

The conformity assessment procedure referred in Article 10 and detailed in Annex III of Directive 1999/5/EC has been
followed.

We hereby declare that all essential radio test suites have been conducted and that the above named Class 2
product is in conformity to all essential requirements and provisions of the Directive 1999/5/EC of the European
Parliament and of the Council of March 9, 1999 on Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment.

As required by the Conformity Assessment procedure, the technical documentation is held at the location above.

Dollard-des-Ormeaux, Quebec CANADA


3 December, 2002

Rami Hobeychi
Director of Quality
Microwave Communications Division

V3.0
MicroStar®
7/8/13/15/18 GHz
Digital Radio
(Type-II IDU)

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
May 2004
IMN-902220-E05

Capacities*

ANSI Rates, T1= 1.544 Mbit/s


Freq. CEPT Rates, E1=2.048 Mbit/s
Band,
GHz 16
Product 2 T1 4 T1 8 T1 T3 2 E1a 4 E1 8 E1 16 E1
T1

7b 3 3 3 3
Upper 8a
NA 3 3 3 3
MicroStar®
Lower 8 3 3 3 3
M (QPSK)
13 3 3 3 3
15 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
18 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
7 3 3 3
MicroStar®
H (16 QAM) Upper 8 NA 3 3 3
Lower 8 3 3 3
a. 2 E1 QPSK and 4 E1 16 QAM are presently non-ETSI compliant as to CW interference
b. Also known as the MicroStar® Plus 7/8 GHz
Revision history
Issue date Status Description of change / revision
July 28, 2001 DRN C8700 • First release
• Added information on Web-CIT
July 11, 2002 ECO C9888
• General update
• Added Software Upgrade Procedure
February 12, 2003 ECO C10129 • Added changing capacities/modulation procedure
• General update
• Modified the software upgrade procedure
January 7, 2004 ECO 22027
• Added installation procedure for PCMCIA cards
March 10, 2004 ECO 22388 • Updated to cover new software

Part Nº IMN-902220-E05
© Copyright 2003 HARRIS CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
MicroStar®, FARSCAN™, and STARVIEW™ are trademarks of
HARRIS CORPORATION
Data subject to change without notice.

Harris Corporation - Harris Corporation -


Microwave Communications Division Microwave Communications Division
350 Twin Dolphin Drive 3, rue Hôtel de Ville
Redwood Shores, CA 94065-1421 Dollard-des-Ormeaux, Québec,
1-650-594-3800 Canada H9B 3G4
1-800-227-8332 1 800 277-8332 or 1-514-421-8400
FAX: 1-650-594-3621 FAX: 1-514-421-3555
WARNING
Making adjustments and/or modifications to this equipment that are not in
accordance with the provisions of this instruction manual or other
supplementary documentation may result in personal injury or damage to
the equipment, and may void the equipment warranty.

AVERTISSEMENT
Tout réglage ou modification faits à cet équipement hors du cadre édicté
par ce guide d’utilisation ou par toute autre documentation supplémentaire
pourraient causer des blessures ou endommager l’équipement et peut
entraîner l’annulation de sa garantie.

WARNUNG
Die an diesen Geräten gemachte Einstellungen und/oder Änderungen,
welche nicht gemäß dieser Bedienungsanleitung, oder gemäß anderen
zusätzlichen Anleitungen, ausgeführt werden, können Verletzungen oder
Materialschäden zur Folge haben und eventuell die Garantie ungültig
machen.

Advertencia
Llevar a cabo ajustamientos y (o) modificaciones a este equipo, sin seguir
las instrucciones provistas por este manual u otro documento adicional,
podría resultar en lesiones a su persona o daños al equipo, y terminar la
garantía de este último.
i

CONTENTS

CONTENTS
PREFACE

CHAPTER 1, IDENTIFICATION DIAGRAMS


Conventions ........................................................................................... 1-11

CHAPTER 2, GENERAL INFORMATION


Notes and Warnings ..................................................................................... 2-1
Electrostatic-Sensitive Devices (ESD) .......................................................... 2-1
EIA Symbols ........................................................................................... 2-1
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes ................................................................... 2-2
Symbols and Text ..................................................................................... 2-2
Functional Description .................................................................................. 2-3
The MicroStar® M/H Radio ......................................................................... 2-3
Physical Characteristics ............................................................................. 2-4
The SPU .............................................................................................. 2-4
The PU ................................................................................................ 2-4
The ODU.............................................................................................. 2-5
Monitoring and Control .............................................................................. 2-5
Theory of operation ...................................................................................... 2-6
Transmitting ............................................................................................ 2-6
Receiving................................................................................................. 2-7
Equipment and Path Protection ...................................................................... 2-8
Introduction ............................................................................................. 2-8
Protection .............................................................................................. 2-10
Dynamic Characteristics........................................................................... 2-10
Control and Monitoring ............................................................................ 2-13
The Cable Link........................................................................................ 2-15
The Netcom channel................................................................................ 2-15
Network Management Data .................................................................. 2-15
Service Channel (Orderwire) ................................................................ 2-16
Netcom connections ............................................................................ 2-16
Physical Characteristics .............................................................................. 2-17
The SPU and PU...................................................................................... 2-17
Site Considerations for an Equipment Rack................................................. 2-18
Coaxial Cable ......................................................................................... 2-18
Weights and Dimensions .......................................................................... 2-19
Materials and Finish ................................................................................ 2-20
Frequency Planning .................................................................................... 2-21
Frequency bands .................................................................................... 2-21
Allocated RF Channel Bandwidth ............................................................... 2-22
T/R Frequency Spacing ............................................................................ 2-22
Frequency plans ..................................................................................... 2-23
T/I versus frequency spacing curves.......................................................... 2-24
Transmit spectrum curves ........................................................................ 2-24
Standards Compliance ............................................................................. 2-24

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


ii CONTENTS

Technical Specifications .............................................................................. 2-25


Tributary Signal Characteristics ................................................................ 2-25
Intermediate Frequency....................................................................... 2-25
The Alarm Indication Signal (all ones) — Generation Criteria..................... 2-25
Receive Resynchronization Time ........................................................... 2-26
Transmission Bit Rate.......................................................................... 2-26
AIS Alarm Removal Criteria .................................................................. 2-26
Tributary Transmission Time ................................................................ 2-27
Transmitter............................................................................................ 2-27
Transmit Output Power ........................................................................ 2-27
Receiver ................................................................................................ 2-29
Receive Threshold............................................................................... 2-29
Dispersive Fade Margin........................................................................ 2-31
Performance Curves ................................................................................ 2-34
Service Channel...................................................................................... 2-34
Optional Voice Frequency (VF) Channel.................................................. 2-34
The FarScan Interface ............................................................................. 2-34
Power Supply ......................................................................................... 2-35
Power Consumption ............................................................................ 2-35
Environment ............................................................................................. 2-36
Optional Sun Shield................................................................................. 2-36
Lightning Protection and the Installation Site Plan ....................................... 2-36
Reliability and Repair Time ....................................................................... 2-36
Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) ..................................................... 2-36
Mean Time to Repair (MTTR) ................................................................ 2-36
ISO 9001 Certification ......................................................................... 2-37
ISO 14001 Certification ....................................................................... 2-37
Environmental Specifications (Temperature, Vibration, and Humidity) ............ 2-38
Compliance to Technical Standards .............................................................. 2-40

CHAPTER 3, INSTALLATION
Introduction ............................................................................................. 3-1
Qualifications of Installation Personnel ......................................................... 3-1
Installing the ODU ....................................................................................... 3-2
Install the antenna ............................................................................... 3-5
Install the optional sun shield ................................................................ 3-6
Install the ODU mounting hardware ........................................................ 3-7
Install the optional ODU installation tool .................................................. 3-8
Hang the ODU on the installation tool...................................................... 3-9
Mount the ODU on the antenna mast .................................................... 3-11
Remove the ODU installation tool ......................................................... 3-12
Connect the ODU to the antenna .......................................................... 3-13
Install the coaxial cable from the ODU to the SPU ................................... 3-15
Ground the ODU and the Coaxial Cable ................................................. 3-19
Installing the ODU indoors ................................................................... 3-21
Where required, install the ODU indoors................................................. 3-21
Installing the SPU and PU .......................................................................... 3-24
Configure the SPU mounting hardware .................................................. 3-25
Install the SPU in the rack ................................................................... 3-26
Install the optional BNC connector panels (E1) ....................................... 3-27

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


iii

Connect the Coaxial Cables to the SPU and PU ....................................... 3-28


Ground the SPU and PU....................................................................... 3-30

CONTENTS
Safety Requirements for Grounding ....................................................... 3-30
Connect power to the SPU and PU ........................................................ 3-31
Connect remote communications equipment, as required......................... 3-33
Connect other SPUs in repeater or spur configuration .............................. 3-34
If required, connect alarm relays and auxiliary alarm inputs ..................... 3-35
Installing PCMCIA cards ...................................................................... 3-37
Putting the Radio into Service ...................................................................... 3-40
Connect the operator control device ...................................................... 3-41
Establish a radio link........................................................................... 3-42
Fine-align the antenna ........................................................................ 3-43
Finish configuring the radio.................................................................. 3-44
Perform a long count .......................................................................... 3-45
Connect customer traffic ..................................................................... 3-48

CHAPTER 4, OPERATION
The Power Switch ........................................................................................ 4-1
The LED Indicator ........................................................................................ 4-2
The Internal Alarm Relays ............................................................................. 4-2
The External Alarm Inputs ............................................................................ 4-2
The Software .............................................................................................. 4-4
Rebooting ................................................................................................... 4-4
SNMP Access ............................................................................................... 4-5
Using Web-CIT ............................................................................................ 4-6
An introduction to Web CIT ........................................................................ 4-7
Screen Layout ...................................................................................... 4-7
Header Frame ...................................................................................... 4-7
Navigation Frame.................................................................................. 4-8
The Content Frames .............................................................................. 4-8
Using Web CIT to Configure New Radios .................................................... 4-10
MicroStar® Network Setup — Type-II IDU ................................................. 4-11
On IP Addresses — Definitions .................................................................. 4-11
Configuring Router A ............................................................................... 4-15
Recovering from a Network Connection Loss............................................... 4-15
Probable conditions causing connection loss: .......................................... 4-15
Configuring the MicroSoft Internet Explorer ................................................ 4-17
Procedure .......................................................................................... 4-17
Using the Embedded Control Software .......................................................... 4-23
Connecting and using a hand-held terminal unit or a VT-100 terminal ............ 4-23
Hand-Held Terminal Unit...................................................................... 4-23
VT-100 Terminal ................................................................................. 4-24
Configuring and operating the radio with a hand held terminal or
other VT-100 compatible terminal ............................................................. 4-26
Moving from Menu to Menu .................................................................. 4-26
The Menu Item Tree and the Menu Item Glossary.................................... 4-26
Path Notation ..................................................................................... 4-27
Passwords ......................................................................................... 4-27
Selecting Menu Options ....................................................................... 4-29
The NE Address .................................................................................. 4-29

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


iv CONTENTS

Loopback ........................................................................................... 4-30


Configuring the MicroStar® Radio .......................................................... 4-31
Automatic Inter-Unit Software Download ............................................... 4-31
Setting Frequencies............................................................................. 4-32
Attenuating the Transmit Signal............................................................ 4-32
Remote Time-Out ............................................................................... 4-32
Upgrading the Software and Firmware .......................................................... 4-33
Overview ........................................................................................... 4-35
Installing the MCD Software Upgrade Utility ........................................... 4-37
Upgrading the Software on All Sites ...................................................... 4-38
Download the Firmware Files to All Sites ................................................ 4-41
Why do we synchronize the Reboot after Firmware Download ................... 4-42
Using the Upgrade Utility to Initiate a Synchronized Reboot ...................... 4-42
Using the HHT/VT-100 to Initiate a Synchronized Reboot ......................... 4-43
Using the Web CIT to Initiate a Synchronized Network-wide Reboot........... 4-44
Validating the Upgrade Using the HHT/VT-100 ........................................ 4-46
Validating the Successful Firmware Upgrade using the Web CIT ................ 4-48
Re-enabling the RPTR Ports on the Local Radio (for systems running software
v9.0 only).......................................................................................... 4-49

CHAPTER 5, MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING


Maintenance ............................................................................................... 5-1
General Considerations ................................................................................. 5-2
Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 5-2
Troubleshooting with the LEDs.................................................................... 5-2
Troubleshooting with the hand-held terminal or the VT-100 terminal ............... 5-2
Replacing Units ............................................................................................ 5-4
Replacing a Faulty, but functional SPU ..................................................... 5-4
Replacing a Non-Functioning SPU ............................................................ 5-7
Replacing the PU ...................................................................................... 5-8
Replacing an ODU Module ............................................................................. 5-9
Replacing a Transceiver ............................................................................. 5-9
Replacing an HPA (MicroStar® 7/8 GHz Only) ............................................. 5-12
Removing the HPA .............................................................................. 5-12
Installing the HPA ............................................................................... 5-12
Changing the Frequency of the Radio ........................................................ 5-28
Replacing the Diplexer............................................................................. 5-28

CHAPTER 6, OPTIONS AND ORDERING


Ordering ..................................................................................................... 6-1
Part Numbers Versus Product Codes ............................................................ 6-1
Spare Unit Ordering Information ................................................................. 6-2
Placing the order .................................................................................. 6-2
Selecting the ACU Option ........................................................................... 6-3
Customer Service Information ..................................................................... 6-20
Quality Policy ......................................................................................... 6-20
Standard Product Warranty ...................................................................... 6-20
Services Offered ..................................................................................... 6-22
Technical Assistance Center ..................................................................... 6-22

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


v

24-Hour Technical Assistance ................................................................... 6-25


Repair and Return................................................................................... 6-25

CONTENTS
Repair and Exchange Warranty ................................................................. 6-25
Module Exchange .................................................................................... 6-26
Return Material Authorization ................................................................... 6-26
Restocking Charge .................................................................................. 6-28
Emergency Repair................................................................................... 6-28
Equipment Damaged During Shipment....................................................... 6-28
Evaluation Fee........................................................................................ 6-29
Irreparable Units .................................................................................... 6-29
Return Freight ........................................................................................ 6-29
On-Site Field Service Repair ..................................................................... 6-30
Annual Repair Service Program (ARSP) ...................................................... 6-30
Customer Training .................................................................................. 6-31
General Training Policy ............................................................................ 6-32

APPENDIX A, CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS


SPU Front Panel Ports and Connections ........................................................... A-1

APPENDIX B, MENU TREE, (FOR SW 9.6.5)

APPENDIX C, MENU ITEM GLOSSARY (FOR SW V9.6.5)

APPENDIX D, APPLICATION NOTES


Typical Terminal Configurations ..................................................................... D-1
MicroStar® Repeater ................................................................................ D-2
Typical Repeater with Spur......................................................................... D-3
Control and Monitoring ................................................................................. D-4
Using SNMP to Control your Network ........................................................... D-6
The DHCP Server ...................................................................................... D-8
Surge Protection Information ......................................................................... D-9
Introduction ............................................................................................. D-9
Surge Protection Overview ......................................................................... D-9
Primary Protection ................................................................................ D-9
Secondary Protection............................................................................. D-9
Surge Protection Devices ....................................................................... D-9
Primary Protection References .................................................................. D-11
Secondary Protection by Connector Type.................................................... D-11
Connector Summary Table ....................................................................... D-11
Using Web CIT to Access a Radio with older software. ..................................... D-13
Connecting to the Remote Site Radio......................................................... D-15
Configuring the Management Station to Run the earlier version of Web CIT .... D-16
Installing Sun’s Java Runtime Environment ............................................ D-16
Allowing Signed and Unsigned Contents ................................................. D-17
Adding Radios to the List of Trusted Sites............................................... D-19
Granting all Permissions to Trusted Sites................................................ D-19
Internet security considerations ............................................................ D-20

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


vi CONTENTS

APPENDIX E, GLOSSARY

APPENDIX I, INDEX

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


PREFACE

PREFACE
ISO 9001 Certification

The Harris Microwave Communications Division is committed to total customer


satisfaction and is I.S. EN ISO 9001: 1994 registered for the design, manufacture,
installation and service of microwave radio systems.

ISO 14001 Certification

Harris Microwave Communication Division believes that corporations have a


responsibility towards the environment and must operate their business in a manner
that integrates environmental preoccupation.
Harris Microwave Communications Montreal operations is I.S. EN ISO 14001:1996
registered for the design, manufacture, installation and service of microwave radio
systems.

Technical Assistance Center

Our Technical Assistance Center (TAC) is staffed with factory trained and highly
qualified Product Support staff whose task is to provide telephone support to resolve
complex customer equipment problems quickly and accurately in a timely manner.
Customers who completed product training given by Harris Microwave
Communications Division and are equipped with proper test equipment and spare parts
will experience quick resolution of their equipment problems.
Harris Corporation — Microwave Communications Division
330 Twin Dolphin Drive
Redwood Shores, CA 94065-1421, USA
Phone: 1-800-227-8332 or 1-650-594-3800
Fax: 1-650-594-3621
Harris Corporation — Microwave Communications Division
3 Hotel-de-Ville
Dollard-des-Ormeaux, Quebec
Canada H9B 3G4
Phone: 1-800-227-8332 or 1-514-421-8333
Fax: 1-514-685-4580

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


viii PREFACE

Harris S.A. de C.V.


Ejército Nacional No. 926
Primer piso,
Colonia Palmas Polanco
Mexico, D.F. C.P. 11560
Phone: +52-55-5-249 3700
Fax: +52-55-5-249 3701 & 02
Harris Corporation — Philippines
For Asian customers only
8/F Pacific Star Building
Sen. Gil Puyat, corner Makati Ave.
Makati City, Philippines
Phone: +63-2-818-5111
Fax: +63-2-818-8165
Harris Communication S.A.
Centrale Parc, Bât. 4, Immeuble Pasteur
Avenue Sully Prodhomme
France 92298
Fax S&S:+(33) 1 55 52 80 12
Hotline:+(33) 1 55 52 80 80
Customer Mail box: custemea@harris.com
Harris Corporation — Malaysia
1109B, 10th Floor, Block E
Kelana Parkview Tower, Unit No.1, Jalan SS 6/2,
Kelana Jaya, 47301 Petaling Jaya, Selangor,
Malaysia
Phone: +603-704-6303
Fax: +603-703-1814
Harris Comm. (Shenzhen) LTD.
R3-B2 High-Tech Industrial Park
Nanshan District, Shenzhen 518057
The People’s Republic of China
Phone: +86-755-663-7928
Fax: +86-755-663-7048

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


ix

Harris do Brasil

PREFACE
Alameda Rio Negro, 1030
2o. andar, CJ-202/4/6
Alphaville
Barueri, SP
CEP - 06454-000
Tel: 4197 3000
Fax: 4197 3001
Customer Service: 4197 3201
Harris Coporation — Colombia
Orbecom
C/o: Harris Microwave Division
Calle 101, No. 44-58
Bogota, Colombia
Ph: +571-533-0912

e-mail: wotero@harris.com <mailto:wotero@harris.com>


Visit our customer service web site at: http://www.microwave.harris.com/cservice
See ’Options and Ordering’ on page 6-1 for more information about technical assistance
and customer service.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


x PREFACE

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Dear Customer,
To facilitate warranty support and to receive product update
information, please register on the Harris MCD Premier Customer
website:

https://premier.harris.com/microwave

If you are unable to register online, please complete the form


at the bottom of this page and return this page to our customer
service department.

By Fax: 514-685-4580

By email: crcmtl@harris.com

By mail: Harris Corporation


Microwave Communications Division
3 Hotel de Ville
Dollard-des-Ormeaux, Quebec
CANADA H9B3G4

PLEASE PRINT:
Company Name:
Requestor's Name:
Title: Dept:
Address:
City: State/Province:

ZIP/Postal Code: Country:


Telephone Number: Fax Number:
Email:
Original Sales Order/PO Number:

Sales order numbers are found in your documentation and are stencilled on the equipment rack base plate,
for example, A44044A1.
xii PREFACE

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


1
C H A P T E R

IDENTIFICATION
DIAGRAMS
IDENTIFICATION DIAGRAMS
This chapter contains figures identifying the main components of the
MicroStar® system, as well as a detailed description of their functions.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


1-2 IDENTIFICATION DIAGRAMS

Figure 1-1: A Non-Protected Terminal —


(T3 SPU shown, with the 18 GHz ODU)

Antenna

Twistable Transceiver
Waveguide

ODU

Coaxial Cable

SPU
(T3)

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


1-3

Figure 1-2: A 15 GHz Protected Terminal Radio

IDENTIFICATION
DIAGRAMS
Antenna

ODU

Transceiver A Transceiver B

SPU
(Up to 16 E1 or T1)

Coaxial Cables
PU

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


1-4 IDENTIFICATION DIAGRAMS

Figure 1-3: Space Diversity Configurations

ODUs on Pipe

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-5

1 Install the antenna

Tools and material required


• See antenna installation instructions.

Follow the instructions of the antenna manufacturer


that are enclosed with the antenna for the exact details

INSTALLATION
of how to assemble, install, and align the antenna.
Drawings shown here of the antenna assembly are for
reference only and are intended to simply show the
order in which the antenna and the ODU are assembled.

1. Following the instructions in the instruction sheet that is enclosed with the
antenna, assemble and install the antenna on the pole. Since the type of
antenna to use is not known, we cannot provide more detailed
information. The antenna assembly drawings shown here are typical and
are intended to simply show the order in which the antenna and ODU are
assembled. Your antenna may be different.
2. When mounting the antenna, point it as closely as possible at the
coordinating site. If you can not see the coordinating site, use a compass
and map to roughly align the antenna. A more precise alignment will be
done later in ’Putting the Radio into Service’ on page 3-40.
3. While the antenna is on the ground, set the antenna for horizontal or
vertical polarization according to the transmission engineering
requirements of the hop. Follow the antenna manufacture’s instructions.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-6 INSTALLATION

2 Install the optional sun shield

Tools and material required


• Screw driver
A sun shield is required if the ODU is to operate in direct sunlight and the
ambient temperatures exceed 35-38 °C. Where required, install the optional
sun shield as shown in figure 3-3.
Figure 3-3: Installing the optional sun shield on the ODU
1. Screw the two spacers (P/N: 026-020010-705) into the tabs on the bottom
of the ODU.
2. Insert the hooks on the back of the ODU through the corresponding slots
in the sun shield.
3. Attach the ODU to the sun shield with the screws at the top of the ODU.
4. Screw the sun shield to the spacers.
5. Screw the bottom of the ODU to the bottom of the sun shield.

PN: 026-020010-705

1 PN: 026-020010-705

2 5
2

2
5
4

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-7

3 Install the ODU mounting hardware

Tools and material required


• Screw driver
Install the mounting hardware on the ODU as shown in figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4: Installing the ODU Mounting Hardware

INSTALLATION
19 to 22 N • m
(14 to16 lbf-ft.)
2 ODU
ALL NUTS

1. ODU
2. Threaded rod (P/N: 025-901833-001)
3. Bracket (P/N: 020-901794-001)
4. Flat washer (P/N: 025-020007-704)
5. Split (lock) washer
(P/N:025-094453-502) 1
6. Nut (P/N: 025-094453-505)

6 5 4 3

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-8 INSTALLATION

4 Install the optional ODU installation tool

Tools and material required


• 2 adjustable wrenches
The installation tool supports the ODU while it is being attached to the mast.
Install the mounting tool on the mast as shown in figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5: Installing the Optional ODU Installation Tool
(Kit Part Number 098-901202-001)

1
2
3
6

5
4
3
2
1

1. Nut (P/N: 025-094453-505)


2. Split (lock) washer (P/N: 025-094453-502)
3. Flat washer (P/N: 025-020007-704)
4. Threaded rod (P/N: 025-020014-766)
5. Bracket (P/N: 020-901279-001)
6. Hook

1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9

4
The threaded rod must not protrude
more than 6 mm (0.25”) maximum

!
6 mm (0.25”)
maximum

Antenna mast
pole
114 mm (4.5”) ∅ maximum
64 mm (2.5”) ∅ minimum

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-9

5 Hang the ODU on the installation tool

Tools and material required


• Rope with safety hook
Attach a strong rope to the hoist point shown in figure 3-6, hoist the ODU up
the mast, and hang it on the installation tool as shown in the same figure. If the
sun shield is installed, open the top lid to access the hoist point.

Figure 3-6: Hoisting the ODU up to the Antenna.

INSTALLATION
ODU hoist point

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-10 INSTALLATION

Figure 3-7: Hang the ODU on the Installation Tool

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-11

6 Mount the ODU on the antenna mast

Tools and material required


• 2 adjustable wrenches
Figure 3-8: Mounting the ODU on the Antenna Mast

INSTALLATION
1

1. Bracket (P/N: 020-901794-001)


2. Flat washer (P/N: 025-020007-704)
3. Split (lock) washer
(P/N:025-094453-502)
4. Nut (P/N: 025-094453-505)

19 to 22 N • m
(14 to16 lbf-ft.) 4
ALL NUTS
3
2

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-12 Installation

7 Remove the ODU installation tool


INSTALLATION

Tools and material required


• 2 adjustable wrenches
Figure 3-9: Removing the ODU installation tool

Remove the ODU


installation tool

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-13

8 Connect the ODU to the antenna

This step does not apply to an Integrated Antenna


Configuration.

Tools and material required

INSTALLATION
• 2 adjustable wrenches
Use a length of twistable-flexible waveguide to connect the ODU to the
antenna. Be sure to use the right type of waveguide and flanges for the
frequency options of the ODU. See table 3-2.

Table 3-2: Waveguide Flange Type

Frequency Flange Type


• CPR112 Grooved flange all open for 8/32 screws
7/8 GHz
(0.170 in / 4.3mm dia.)
13 GHz • WR75, all tapped for 6-32 screws, choke
15 Ghz • WR62, all tapped for 6-32 screws (UG-541 A/U), choke
• WR42 choke, all tapped for 4-40 screws
18 GHz
• (UG-596 A/U)

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-14 Installation

Figure 3-10: Connecting the waveguide between the ODU and


the antenna

Install the twistable


flexible waveguide
in such a way that
it will not rub against
hard objects in wind

An ODU configured as an unprotected repeater has two


antenna ports, and uses two antennas. One transceiver
in the ODU is used for the west direction antenna, while
the other transceiver in the same ODU is used for the
east direction antenna. Two SPUs are used in this
configuration.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-15

9 Install the coaxial cable from the ODU to the SPU

Tools and material required


• Adjustable wrench
• Multimeter
• Coaxial cable with connector
• Tie-wraps or other means of supporting coaxial cable along run
• Sealing kit

INSTALLATION
This Step applies to the Integrated Antenna-ODU as
well, (Refer to Figures 3-12 and 3-13). A protected
radio has an SPU and a PU. Install coaxial cables from
each of these units to the ODU, one for Channel-A (SPU)
and one for Channel-B (PU).

1. Following the instructions that come with the connector, install a


connector on one end of the coaxial cable that is to go from the ODU to the
SPU.
Figure 3-11: Installing the connector on the cable

FOLLOW MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

2. Verify that the resistance between the coaxial cable’s center connector and
the shield is more than 100 Ω.
3. Verify that the SPU’s power switch is off.
4. Connect the connectorized end of the coaxial cable to the ODU.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-16 Installation

Figure 3-12: Integrated Antenna Assembly —


MicroStar® 7/8 GHz Radio

ANTENNA ASSEMBLY
(REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS)

INTERFACE PLATE

RECEPTACLE KIT (OPTIONAL:


HORIZONTAL POLARISATION ROTATOR)

ODU

Figure 3-13: Integrated Antenna Assembly —


MicroStar® M 13/15/18 GHz Radio
ANTENNA ASSEMBLY
(REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS)

INTERFACE PLATE

(OPTIONAL: HORIZONTAL POLARISATION ROTATOR)

RECEPTACLE KIT

ODU

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-17

Figure 3-14: Connecting the Coaxial Cable to the ODU

Bottom View

INSTALLATION
Ground
Lug Channel A

Tie-wraps

Sealing Sealing
Kit Kit
Channel B

Description Comments Part Number


Foam core 50 Ω heliax Cable only, XX0 =
shielded cable 210m to 300M in 10 M 087-099499-XX0
(Andrews LDF2-50) increments
45M Kit contains low loss 099-901208-001
Low loss 90M RG 8/U cable, sealing 099-901208-002
50 Ω kit, 2 N-type
RG 8/U kit 150M connectors, and 3 099-901208-003
210M grounding kits. 099-901208-004

5. Following the instructions in the sealing kit, waterproof the connection to


the ODU.
6. Run the coaxial cable from the ODU to the SPU or the place where the SPU
will be. Attach the coaxial cable to supports as required and bring it
indoors through a water proof entry.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-18 Installation

Figure 3-15: Typical Cable Run

Waterproof
Entry

Support Coaxial Cable

Leave Bare Cable End


Near SPU Position

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-19

10 Ground the ODU and the Coaxial Cable

Tools and material required


• Common tools
• Three or more grounding kits

SAFETY REQUIREMENT
Connect the ODU ground lug to earth ground.

INSTALLATION
Do not connect it to the electrical utility ground.

For a protected radio, ground both coaxial cables.

Ground the ODU as shown in figure 3-16.


Use the grounding kits to ground the coaxial cable at the ODU, the SPU and on
the antenna side of any right angle turns.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-20 Installation

Figure 3-16: Grounding the ODU and the Coaxial Cable

Coaxial grounding kits are


not required for an
indoor installation;
however, both the ODU
and the rack must be
connected to a good
common grounding point.

Coaxial Grounding Kits

Tie-wraps
Secure ground wire as required Bottom View
Ground
Lug Channel A

Install coaxial grounding kits at the ODU,


on the antenna side of every right angle
turn, and at the entry to the shelter

Channel B

3.26mm Diameter (8AWG)


Multistrand Copper Cable

Coaxial Grounding Kits


Common Grounding Point

Coaxial Grounding Kits

For a roof-top installation, connect to the building ground, or the water


supply pipe just before it enters the building. For a tower installation, connect
to a good ring ground system made from buried copper cables and rods.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-21

11 Installing the ODU indoors

Although the ODU is designed to be mounted outdoors close to the antenna, it


can be mounted indoors on the rack with the SPU, if required.
Tools and material required
• Common tools
• Waveguide pressurizing equipment

Where required, install the ODU indoors

INSTALLATION
1. Using the screws and clips provided, attach the rack mounting bracket to
the rack. We recommend putting it in rack mounting spaces 23 through 32.
Remember that, because of the waveguide, nothing should go in the rack
above radio. (See figure 3-17).
2. Attach the ODU to the bracket by inserting the hooks on the back of the
ODU into the slots provided for them on the bracket. (See figure 3-18).
3. Secure the ODU to the bracket by screwing the four captive retaining
screws on the ODU into the threaded holes provide on the bracket.
4. Run rigid or helical waveguide from the antenna to a point above the rack.
Support and ground the waveguide as required. We recommend that you
pressurize the waveguide with dry air as well. (See figure 3-19).
5. Connect the ODUs antenna port to the rigid wave guide with a short length
of flexible twistable waveguide. If possible, do NOT support the flexible
twistable waveguide.

If you have to support the twistable waveguide. Refer to


the cautionary note in figure 3-19.

6. Ground the ODU by running a separate grounding wire from the ODU to
the site’s main ground point. Do not use the same grounding wire as the
SPU.
7. If the SPU has already been installed, connect the ODU to the SPU or
SPU/PU with one or two short lengths of coaxial cable.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-22 Installation

Figure 3-17: Mount the rack-mounting bracket to the rack or


cabinet

Mount in 9 rack spaces


23 through 32
(Recommended)
(Use screws and clips provided)

Figure 3-18: Mount the ODU on the rack-mounting bracket

Captive Screws (4)

Hooks (4)

Ventilated ODU shown


(for MicroStar® 7/8
GHz with HPA option)

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-23

Figure 3-19: Install waveguide between a rack or cabinet-


mounted ODU and the antenna

Waveguide Support

Important:
If you need to
support the flexible
waveguide, be very
Rigid or Helical Waveguide
careful, since it can to Antenna
be easily damaged.

INSTALLATION
Use loosely tied
twine or some other Typical pressure
connection
material that will not
bend or compress the
waveguide. Flexible Waveguide

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-24 Installing the SPU and PU

Installing the SPU and PU


INSTALLATION

Table 3-3: Equipment and Tools required

Required equipment
Tool specifications Where used

Screwdrivera Phillips #2 General


Multimeter With ohm meter
Miscellaneous tools • "Connect the Coaxial Cables
for installing Refer to the manufacturer to the SPU and PU"
connectors on the documentation provided with the on page 3-28
SPU to ODU coaxial connector.
cable.
a. Part of an optionally available tool kit, part number 098-093607-027.

Figure 3-20: Parts for SPU Installation

SPU
Tie-Wraps or Cable Clamps
to Support Cables

Although most of the following figures show only the


SPU, this installation procedure applies to the PU as
well.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the SPU and PU 3-25

1 Configure the SPU mounting hardware

Tools and material required


• A number 2 cross-head screw driver
1. For flush mounting in a rack, replace the standard brackets by the optional
longer brackets, as shown in figure 3-21. (The SPU ships with standard
brackets allowing the front of the SPU to extend past the front of the rack).

Figure 3-21: Installing Brackets for Flush Mounting in a Rack

INSTALLATION
Remove standard brackets

Align holes in the longer bracket


with those on the SPU

All cable routings depicted in the following installation


steps are shown for illustration purposes only.
In order to easily replace a unit, ensure that all cables
are routed from the rack sides and at the level of their
respective connectors. Doing so, allows you to replace a
unit with the least operation disruption.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-26 Installation

2 Install the SPU in the rack

Tools and material required


• A number-2 cross-head screw driver
Secure the SPU to the rack with the screws provided, as shown in figure 3-22.
The position will depend on your situation and what other equipment you have
or plan to have in the rack.

Mount the SPU in a rack ONLY over a non-


combustible material.

Figure 3-22: Secure SPU Brackets to Rack

Allow at least 2 RMS in


this area for easier unit
replacement

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the SPU and PU 3-27

3 Install the optional BNC connector panels (E1)

Tools and material required


• A number-2 cross-head screw driver
Install one connector panel for each group of 8 tributaries.
Refer to figure 3-23.
Figure 3-23: BNC Connector Panels (16 E1 Option shown here)

INSTALLATION
Part Number
101-901415-002
(2 required for
16 E1 Capacity)

See Note below.

Ensure aligning the pins of each SCSI connector/port


before insertion. Install FIRST the bottom connector
(PU), then pull strongly on the cable for properly
aligning the connector pins on the top SCSI port (SPU)
before insertion. Then, finger tighten the fine screws.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-28 Installation

4 Connect the Coaxial Cables to the SPU and PU

Tools and material required


• Common tools
• A multimeter
• An N-type connector compatible with the type of coaxial cable that you
are using.

If the ODU has already been installed you should find the end of the
interconnect cable near the SPU. If the ODU has not been installed,
ignore this step.
1. Cut the cable to a length which will leave about 6 inches (15 cm) of slack
after it has been connected to the SPU and PU.
2. Following the instructions that come with the connector, install an N-type
connector on each cable.
3. Using the multimeter, check that the resistance between the coaxial cable’s
center connector and the shield is more than 100 Ω, with the far end
connected to the ODU.

A lower resistance value indicates that there is a


short in the coaxial cable or in the ODU that may
damage the SPU’s switch (fuse) when it is
switched ON. If this is the case, replace the faulty
element (cable or ODU).

4. Connect the cables to the CBL ports on the SPU and PU.
5. Support the cable if necessary.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the SPU and PU 3-29

Figure 3-24: Connecting the Coaxial Cable to the SPU and PU


Bring cable trough
waterproof entry

INSTALLATION
Support cable
as required

Leave Slack

Resistance between the coaxial cable’s


center connector and the shield must be
more than 100 Ω

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-30 Installation

5 Ground the SPU and PU

Tools and material required


• A number-2 cross-head screw driver
Ground the SPU and PU by connecting 3.26 mm (8 AWG) copper cable from
the grounding point on the left rack-mounting bracket to the radio system’s
main grounding point. For a roof-top installation, the main grounding point
could be the building ground, or the water supply pipe just before it enters the
building. For a tower installation it should be a good ring ground system made
from buried copper cables and rods. Do NOT connect to the electrical utility
ground.

Safety Requirements for Grounding


1. It is very important that the path of lowest impedance go directly to the
main grounding point.
2. Do not connect other equipment to the same grounding cable as the SPU.
Each piece of equipment at the site should have a separate grounding cable
to a common very low impedance main grounding point.
3. Locate this equipment in the same immediate area (adjacent cabinets) as
any other equipment that has a connection between the earthed conductor
of the same d.c. supply circuit and the earthing conductor, and also the
point of earthing of the d.c. system. DO NOT earth the d.c. system
elsewhere.
4. Connect this equipment directly to the d.c. supply system earthing
electrode conductor or to a bonding jumper from an earthing terminal bar,
or bus to which the d.c. supply earthing electrode is connected.
5. Locate the d.c. supply source within the same premises as the equipment.
6. There shall be no switching or disconnecting devices in the earthed circuit
conductor between the d.c. source and the point of connection of the
earthing electrode conductor.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the SPU and PU 3-31

6 Connect power to the SPU and PU

Connect the power supply as shown in figure 3-25. Check that the junction-
block screws are tight enough to hold the power wires securely in place, then set
the SPU (and PU) switch to the I (ON) position.
If you have purchased the optional fuse panel see figure 3-26 for installation
instructions for it.
Figure 3-25: Power Connections

Kit Part No. 099-902158-001

INSTALLATION
(Follow cable/connector assembly
instructions supplied in the Kit)

SPU Safety Requirement


! Use one fuse per SPU

Power source A:
required ±21 to 60 Vdc

PU 10 A Slow Blow Battery


±21 TO 60 Vdc
Positive or
Negative Ground

Power source B:
Alternate required ±21 to 60 Vdc
Grounding Point
10 A Slow Blow Battery
±21 TO 60 Vdc
Positive or
Negative Ground
Ground wire
(10 mm2, 8 AWG)

Safety Requirement:
! Connect to earth ground.
Common Grounding Point Do not connect to the
(see step-18) electrical utility ground.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-32 Installation

Figure 3-26: Connecting the Optional Fuse Panel


Rack with Fuse Panel

Stick peg holders on panel above fuse slots


Insert colored pegs to indicate value of corresponding fuses
Connect to PU +/- terminal
Connect to PU terminal

From PU Battery Connect to grounded rack

Connect to SPU +/- terminal


Connect to SPU terminal
From SPU’s Battery

Insert fuses
Use 10A slow blow GMT type fuse
Keep fuse blanks in unused positions
If required, connect
alarm equipment
Stick fuse usage to alarm relays here
labels to panel

POS LOCATION
To SPU To Alarm

To Common
Ground Point
Check that wire is on
this side of clamp

Use small screwdriver


Turn clockwise to tighten

Install junction covers when finished

Connect the terminal labelled BATT to the


battery terminal that is not grounded
Connect the terminal labelled RTN to the
battery terminal that is grounded

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the SPU and PU 3-33

7 Connect remote communications equipment,


as required

Tools and material required


• Common tools
Multi-hop systems usually require some way to communicate with and control
equipment at remote sites. The MicroStar® radio allows you to do this with a
telephone link, a data link to third party RTUs, and/or a FarScan™ or SNMP
data link. Depending on your needs, connect this equipment as shown in
figure 3-27.

INSTALLATION
The DATA channel is configured as DCE only. Use a null
modem to connect it to DCE equipment.

Figure 3-27: Connecting Remote Communications Equipment


RPTR (IN) R TRIB 1 - 8

10BASE-T
DATA (RS-232) RELAYS / ALARMS
FUSE 8A SB TRIB 9 - 16

CBL BAT +/- ALM TERMINAL NMS PROTECTION


RPTR (OUT) PCMCIA

FUSE 8A SB

CBL BAT +/- ALM PROTECTION RELAYS / ALARMS

Connect network cable


Connect serial data with RJ45 connector for
communications to Ethernet-IP connection for
or from third party Web CIT and FTP
control equipment
Use this port with one
DATA (RS-232) or two PCMCIA PC 10BASE-T
Cards for connecting
DCD_DAT 1 FarScan™, and
DSR_DAT
DAT_RX
6
2
optional orderwire.
CTS_DAT 7 Please see "Installing
DAT_TX 3
CTS_DAT 8 PCMCIA cards" on page
DTR_DAT 4
+5VB 9 3-37 for instructions on
GROUND 5 NMS
installing PCMCIA cards
and installing cables.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-34 Installation

8 Connect other SPUs in repeater or spur


configuration

Tools and material required


• Common tools
• Network cables, RJ45, 10Base-T compliant, length as required:
- 1 for repeater
- 1 for protected repeater
- 2 for repeater with spur
If the radio you are installing is part of a repeater, or a repeater with a spur,
connect the RPTR (IN) and RPTR (OUT) connectors together as shown below.
Figure 3-28: Connecting the Network Channel between SPUs
in a Repeater Configuration
(Repeater with Spur Shown)

RPTR (IN) R TRIB 1 - 8

10BASE-T
DATA (RS-232) RELAYS / ALARMS
FUSE 8A SB TRIB 9 - 16

CBL BAT +/- ALM TERMINAL NMS PROTECTION


RPTR (OUT) PCMCIA

Part No. 087-020193-xxx.


(Refer to table 6-1 for details)

RPTR (IN) R TRIB 1 - 8

10BASE-T
DATA (RS-232) RELAYS / ALARMS
FUSE 8A SB TRIB 9 - 16

CBL BAT +/- ALM TERMINAL NMS PROTECTION


RPTR (OUT) PCMCIA

RPTR (IN) R TRIB 1 - 8

10BASE-T
DATA (RS-232) RELAYS / ALARMS
FUSE 8A SB TRIB 9 - 16

CBL BAT +/- ALM TERMINAL NMS PROTECTION


RPTR (OUT) PCMCIA

The repeater (IN/OUT) connections provide protection


for the service channels, as well as network data and
customer data on SPUs.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the SPU and PU 3-35

9 If required, connect alarm relays and auxiliary


alarm inputs

Tools and material required


• Common tools
If you need to connect the MicroStar’s relays to a third party RTU or other
equipment, or if you want to connect external alarms to the MicroStar’s alarm
monitoring points: do so as shown in figure 3-29.
Figure 3-29: Connections for Relays and Customer-

INSTALLATION
Generated Alarms
RPTR (IN) R TRIB 1 - 8

10BASE-T
DATA (RS-232) RELAYS / ALARMS
FUSE 8A SB TRIB 9 - 16

CBL BAT +/- ALM TERMINAL NMS PROTECTION


RPTR (OUT) PCMCIA

FUSE 8A SB

CBL BAT +/- ALM PROTECTION RELAYS / ALARMS

Relays are de-energized when alarm is active


and are rated for 300 ma @ 60Vdc.
The auxiliary alarm inputs are compatible with Connect to alarm relays here.
CMOS logic levels: an input of 2.5V or higher See corresponding software alarm
is interpreted as a high logic level. descriptions to know alarm function.

(pin out descriptions shown on opposite page)

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-36 Installation

SPU’S RELAYS/ALARMS PORT

Pin Description
1 Ground
14 No Connection
2 No Connection
15 No Connection
3 No Connection
16 No Connection
4 No Connection
17 No Connection
5 SUM alarm common Sum Alarm
18 Open = No SUM alarm
6 Closed = No SUM alarm Relay
19 SPU alarm common SPU Alarm
7 Open = No SPU alarm
Relay
20 Closed = No SPU alarm
8 ODU alarm common ODU Alarm
21 Open = No ODU alarm
9 Closed = No ODU alarm Relay
22 Cable alarm common Cable Alarm
10 Open = No Cable alarm
23 Closed = No Cable alarm Relay
11 Input Alarm 1, active low
24 Input Alarm 2, active low
12 Input Alarm 3, active low
25 Input Alarm 4, active low
13 Ground

PU’S RELAYS/ALARMS PORT

Pin Description
1 Ground
14 No Connection
2 No Connection
15 No Connection
3 No Connection
16 No Connection
4 No Connection
17 No Connection
5 SUM alarm common Sum Alarm
18 Open = No SUM alarm
6 Closed = No SUM alarm Relay
19 PU alarm common PU Alarm
7 Open = No PU alarm
Relay
20 Closed = No PU alarm
8 ODU alarm common ODU Alarm
21 Open = No ODU alarm
9 Closed = No ODU alarm Relay
22 Cable alarm common Cable Alarm
10 Open = No Cable alarm
23 Closed = No Cable alarm Relay
11 Input Alarm 5, active low
24 Input Alarm 6, active low
12 Input Alarm 7, active low
25 Input Alarm 8, active low
13 Ground

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the SPU and PU 3-37

10 Installing PCMCIA cards

Tools and material required


• Common tools
The Type-II IDU currently supports two optional PCMCIA cards: The
orderwire card and a dual RS-232 card used to connect to FarScan. If you have
purchased one or both of these PCMCIA cards you will receive them as
separately packaged kits that you will have to install. The contents, names, and
part numbers of these kits are as follows

INSTALLATION
• PCMCIA CBL 2 CHANNEL RS-232, FARSCAN Port,
P/N 099-902203-001
- Dual Serial Port PCMCIA card
- Dual channel RS-233 dongle (includes two separate ferrites)
- Cable Null Modem P/N 087-900468-001
• KIT OW PCMCIA SPU TYPE II, Orderwire, P/N 099-902001-001
- Orderwire PCMCIA card P/N 101-902180-001
- Cable RJ-11/RJ45 P/N 087-902211-011
- Cable Phone EMI P/N 087-902008-001
1. Insert the PCMCIA card — label side facing UP — in the upper slot (A) if
it is empty. If the upper slot is occupied, insert the PCMCIA card into the
lower slot (B).
2. Using the hand-held terminal or Web-CIT, from the menu
SHUTDOWN / SHUTDOWN REASON, enter RESET. You need also to
specify a non-zero value for the shutdown DELAY.

This does not impact traffic in any way. A reset is


required for the SPU to recognize the PCMCIA card and
allow access to the orderwire functions.
To access these functions at any site, you need one
PCMCIA card. We recommend purchasing ONE card per
10 terminals (or a minimum of 2 cards) per network.

3. Connect the cables from the kit to the PCMCIA card as shown in figures 3-
31 and 3-30.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-38 Installation

4. Referring to chapter 4, configure the interface.


For the Serial FARCAN connection
For the channel that you are using for the FARSCAN connection, select
COMPUTER as the protocol, and select the desired speed. Select Disabled
as the protocol for the other channel.
The HHT path is Configuration ⇒ IDU ⇒ PCMCIA ⇒ Dual Serial Port
For the orderwire
You can use the 4-wire port to interface with the service channels of older
Harris equipment or you can use it to connect to an external third party
orderwire unit. If you are using the 4-wire port, you must enable it. If you
are not using the 4-wire port, disable it. If you enable the 4-wire port, select
the In/Out level to be -16/7 dBm or 0/0 dBm.
The HHT path is Configuration ⇒ IDU ⇒ PCMCIA ⇒ Service channel.
Figure 3-30: FARSCAN Port, (EMI Compliant)

(2 ferrites Dual-channel RS-232


provided) Cable
Install the ferrites in this
section of the cable

Attach the cable assembly to the IDU


be means of the plastic strap

RS-232 Ports

This cable is EMI-Compliant to


Class A. An SPU that is not Connect one of these
equipped with a PCMCIA card is connectors to the
EMI-Compliant to Class B. FASCAN channel by
means of the null
modem cable.

To/From
FARSCAN
Equipment Null modem cable P/N 087-900468-001

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the SPU and PU 3-39

Figure 3-31: Orderwire and 10BASE-T Cable, (EMI Compliant)

PCMCIA Card inserted


Arrow is up for correct
orientation of connector

INSTALLATION
Cable RJ-11/RJ-45,
This cable is EMI- P/N 087-902211-001
Compliant to Class A.
An SPU that is not
equipped with a
PCMCIA card is EMI-
Compliant to Class B.

Telephone
(by Harris or others)

2W port 4W port
RJ-11 RJ-45

RJ-11 EMI phone cable


with 240 Ω Ferrite Core

The telephone number used by the orderwire is the


same as the unit’s NE address. See "The NE Address" on
page 4-29.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-40 Installation

Putting the Radio into Service


INSTALLATION

Table 3-4: Equipment and Tools required

Tool Required Equipment Specifications


Digital voltmeter 3-digit; 0.3% dc accuracy; 2% ac accuracy; 0 to 60 V range
• Hand Held Terminal
A operator interface device or
• VT-100 compatible Terminal
Pattern depends on the tributary rate and format of the
Bit error rate test set (BERT) microwave radio (CEPT or North American). HP-3784A or
equivalent.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Putting the Radio into Service 3-41

1 Connect the operator control device

Tools and material required


• Operator control device:
- A VT-100 compatible terminal such as our hand-held terminal
keypad
• Cable for operator control device
Connect a PC, a VT-100 compatible terminal, or a hand-held terminal to the
TERMINAL port on the front of the SPU, as shown in figure 3-32.

RADIO WORK
MAKING THE
Figure 3-32: Connecting an Operator Control Device

OR

TERMINAL

Pin Description
1 DTR_DIS
6 DSR_DIS
2 DIS_Rx
7 RTS_DIS
3 DIS_Tx
8 CTS_DIS
4
9
5
DTR_DIS
+5 Vdc
GROUND
Only one cable is required Cable
part number: 087-900271-480

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-42 Installation

2 Establish a radio link

Tools and material required


• Operator control device:
- A VT-100 compatible terminal such as our hand-held terminal
• Cable for operator control device

Before starting this step you must know what receive


frequency and transmit frequency have been assigned
to both the local and coordinating radios. You must also
have an assistant at the coordinating site.

1. Check that the coordinating site has also been installed up to this point
(Establish a radio link).

In the following steps you will use the embedded control


software (VT-100, or hand-held terminal) or Web CIT to
configure several parameters in both the local and
coordinating radio. Refer to Chapter 4 of this manual for
general information on the subject.

2. Switch ON power to the radio: first the SPU, then the PU, in a protected
system.
3. In the CONFIGURATION / ODU menu, at both the local and coordinating
radios, set the transmit frequencies of the radios to the values that have
been assigned to them (in steps of 125 kHz, for the MicroStar® 7/8 GHz
and 250 kHz for the MicroStar® 13/15/18 GHz). The transmit frequency of
the coordinating radio must be the same as the receive frequency of the
local radio.
4. Check that you have not a SYNC LOSS alarm on the operator control. If
this alarm is present, adjust the antenna position at both the local and the
coordinating site until it disappears.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Putting the Radio into Service 3-43

3 Fine-align the antenna

Tools and material required


• Voltmeter with probes
• Adjustable wrench
1. Adjust the direction of the antenna until you have a maximum AGC
voltage1 at the AGC test points connector on the front of the transceiver as
shown in figure 3-33.
2. When finished, latch the ODU door, tighten the two screws on the door to

INSTALLATION
1.6 N.m (14.4 lb.in) to prevent water infiltration.
3. Clear all forced traffic controls (return to automatic protection switching).
Figure 3-33: Fine Antenna Alignment

AGC
Connection
Note: The Alignment method shown
V
here is typical. Refer to the antenna
VOLTMETER
V
manufacturer’s instructions to know
how to adjust the azimuth and
+ – elevation on your antenna.
In the case of the integrated antenna,
refer to the instructions that
Transceiver accompany the antenna.
(Located within the ODU)

VAGC

Secondary
AGC Voltage Peaks Maximum Peak Resulting
from Side-Lobes Angle from Antenna Alignment
to the Main Lobe

1. The AGC voltage is a positive voltage

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-44 Installation

4 Finish configuring the radio

Tools and material required


• Operator control device:
- A lap-top PC with Web-CIT software
or
- A VT-100 compatible terminal such as our hand-held terminal
• Cable for operator control device
At this point you must know how the radio is to be configured: frequency,
capacity, line code, baud rates, etc. Refer to Appendix B for guidance.
Using the operator control device configure the radio. In a protected system
configure both channels. If required refer to Chapter 4, Appendix B, and
Appendix C for information on how to set the configuration parameters using
the hand held terminal. If you are using the Web-CIT software, you will find the
configuration points in the General Configuration Window and Tributary
Window.
1. Enable the number of tributaries that you will be using.
2. Set the unique NE address for each SPU.
3. If you will be using the DATA port, set its baud rate.
4. Enable (ENABLE) the tributaries that you will be using.
5. Set the line equalizer for the tributaries that you will be using.
6. Select the line code for the tributaries that you will be using.
7. Enable or disable the AIS threshold as required.
8. Select the BER threshold.
9. If you will be using the SNMP feature set SNMP parameters: NMS IP
ADRS, and ALT NMS IP ADRS.
10. If you have the optional orderwire set the voice frequency in/out level.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Putting the Radio into Service 3-45

5 Perform a long count

Tools and material required


• Operator control device:
- A lap-top PC with Web-CIT software
or
- A VT-100 compatible terminal such as our hand-held terminal
• Cable for operator control device
• BERT with cables

INSTALLATION
• Cables to loop back signal so that several channels can be tested at once.
The cable ends must match the connectors on your tributary interface:
BNC or wire wrap.

For this procedure you must either know the NE address


of the coordinating site or have an assistant at the
coordinating site with an operator control device.

To check the system BER performance, perform a long-count on all tributary


channels. Use a bit error rate test set (BERT) to generate and insert the
transmit data stream and to detect errors, if any, in the looped-back received
data stream. See figure 3-34 for the test setup for a long count. Setup the BERT
using table 3-5 and according to your system requirements.

Table 3-5: BERT Setup

Microwave radio tributary,


kbit/s PRBS

2048 215 -1

44736 223 -1

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-46 Installation

1. Enable all tributaries at the local and coordinating site


With Web-CIT:
Set all the tributaries to ENABLE in the Control > Tributary
Configuration > Tributary window.
With embedded control software:
Set all tributaries to ENABLE in the CONFIGURATION / IDU /
TRIBUTARY / TRIBUTARY n [DISABLE / ENABLE] display menu.
2. Set all tributaries at the coordinating site to loopback.
With Web-CIT:
In the Main > Controls menu select Loopback for all tributaries.
With the embedded control software:
If you are operating remotely, in the MAIN / NE ADDRESS set the NE
address to the address of the coordinating site.
In the CONTROL / IDU menu, set TRIBUTARY LPBK n1 to SET for all
tributaries.
3. Loop tributaries at the local radio
At the local radio, using short cables, link the tributary input and output
as shown in figure 3-34. See figure 3-A for the pin out of the tributary
connectors.
4. Set the BERT generator for a PRBS signal
Use the appropriate line code and tributary data rate used by the radio
under test.
With Web-CIT:
In the System > Tributary > Tributary Configuration menu set the line
code of the tributaries to the type that your system uses.
With the embedded control software:
In the CONFIGURATION / IDU / TRIBUTARY CODE / TRIB n1
CODE menus select the correct line code for your system (T-rates only).
5. Connect the BERT generator output
to the input of the tributary 1 input.

1. ‘n’ is the number of the tributary.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Putting the Radio into Service 3-47

6. Connect the BERT receiver input


to the output of the top channel (tributary 4 if the microwave radio has 4
channels, tributary 2 if the microwave radio has 2 channels, and so on).
Requirement: The BERT receiver should indicate a bit error rate of
less than 1 × 10-12 for each hop during the test period. The test period
should be minimum six hours. There should be no single occurrence hit (a
hit is an errored second with more than 10 errors). If the error rate is
worse than 1 × 10-12 for each hop during the period, repeat the test again.
If again the bit error rate is worse than 1 × 10-12 , determine the cause of
the fault and correct the problem.

INSTALLATION
7. Disconnect the local site BERT and test cables.
Clear all of the remote loopback settings.

Figure 3-34: Test Setup for Long Count

Local Site Remote Site


Tributary 1 in
MicroStar®
Tributary 1 out MicroStar® Radio
Tributary 2 in Radio

Tributary 3 out
Tributary 4 in
BERT

Tributary n-1 out


Tributary n in

Tributary n out

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-48 Installation

6 Connect customer traffic

Tools and material required


• Cables with 50-pin male Amphenol connectors.
or
• Adapters to adapt the Amphenol connectors to some other format. For
example:
- Wire-wrap adaptors
- BNC panels
- BNC cable assemblies
(Refer to table 6-1 for spare parts numbers).
Connect the tributaries from your distribution frame to the TRIBUTARIES
(1-8) port and, for the 16 E1 version, the TRIBUTARIES (9-16) port. Refer to
the pin-out in figure 3-A. Note that the number of ports depends on the
capacity (8 E1 or 16 E1) and that the tributary impedance automatically
configures itself to match the circuit connected to the tributary.

If you do not intend to use some tributaries, set


the unused tributaries to DISABLE in the
CONFIGURATION / IDU / TRIBUTARY / TRIBUTARY n
display menu, using a VT-100 terminal. Failure to
do so will cause alarms.

To protect the public telecommunications network, an


approved isolation device must be installed between the
SPU and the public telecommunications network.

Figure 3-35: Traffic Connections


(for 2/4/8/16 E1 or T1 Capacities)

RPTR (IN) R TRIB 1 - 8

10BASE-T
DATA (RS-232) RELAYS / ALARMS
FUSE 8A SB TRIB 9 - 16

CBL BAT +/- ALM TERMINAL NMS PROTECTION


RPTR (OUT) PCMCIA

3-A 3-B

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Putting the Radio into Service 3-49

Detail 3-A: 1-8 Tributaries Port (Balanced / Unbalanced)


Description Description
Unbalanced Balanced Pin Pin Balanced Unbalanced
N.C. N.C. 1 26 N.C. N.C.
Ground Ground 2 27 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring 8 3 28 Out_tip 8 Tributary 8 Out
Ground In_ring 8 4 29 In_tip 8 Tributary 8 In
Ground Ground 5 30 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring 7 6 31 Out_tip 7 Tributary 7 Out
Ground In_ring 7 7 32 In_tip 7 Tributary 7 In
Ground Ground 8 33 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring 6 9 34 Out_tip 6 Tributary 6 Out
Ground In_ring 6 10 35 In_tip 6 Tributary 6 In
Ground Ground 11 36 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring 5 12 37 Out_tip 5 Tributary 5 Out

INSTALLATION
Ground In_ring 5 13 38 In_tip 5 Tributary 5in
Ground Ground 14 39 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring 4 15 40 Out_tip4 Tributary 4 Out
Ground In_ring 4 16 41 In_tip 4 Tributary 4 In
Ground Ground 17 42 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring 3 18 43 Out_tip 3 Tributary 3 Out
Ground In_ring 3 19 44 In_tip 3 Tributary 3 In
Ground Ground 20 45 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring 2 21 46 Out_tip2 Tributary 2 Out
Ground In_ring 2 22 47 In_tip2 Tributary 2 In
Ground Ground 23 48 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring 1 24 49 Out_tip1 Tributary 1 Out
Ground In_ring 1 25 50 In_tip1 Tributary 1 In

Detail 3-B: 9-16 Tributaries Port (Balanced / Unbalanced)

Description Description
Unbalanced Balanced Pin Pin Balanced Unbalanced
N.C. N.C. 1 26 N.C. N.C.
Ground Ground 2 27 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring16 3 28 Out_tip16 Tributary 16 Out
Ground In_ring16 4 29 In_tip16 Tributary 16 In
Ground Ground 5 30 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring15 6 31 Out_tip15 Tributary 15 Out
Ground In_ring15 7 32 In_tip15 Tributary 15 In
Ground Ground 8 33 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring14 9 34 Out_tip14 Tributary 14Out
Ground In_ring14 10 35 In_tip14 Tributary 14 In
Ground Ground 11 36 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring13 12 37 Out_tip13 Tributary 13 Out
Ground In_ring13 13 38 In_tip13 Tributary 13 in
Ground Ground 14 39 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring12 15 40 Out_tip12 Tributary 12 Out
Ground In_ring12 16 41 In_tip12 Tributary 12 In
Ground Ground 17 42 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring11 18 43 Out_tip11 Tributary 11 Out
Ground In_ring11 19 44 In_tip11 Tributary 11 In
Ground Ground 20 45 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring10 21 46 Out_tip10 Tributary 10 out
Ground In_ring10 22 47 In_tip10 Tributary 10 In
Ground Ground 23 48 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring9 24 49 Out_tip9 Tributary 9 Out
Ground In_ring9 25 50 In_tip9 Tributary 9 In

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-50 Installation

Figure 3-36: Tributary Connection Example: Using the BNC


Interconnect Panel. Connect the Amphenol
connector from the BNC panel to the TRIBUTARIES
(1-8) and/or (9-16) ports on the SPU. And, using 75 Ω
coaxial cable with male BNC connectors at the SPU-
end and connectors that you have chosen at the other,
connect the tributary inputs and outputs on the panel
to your equipment. The inputs and outputs are labelled
on the panel.
Up to 16 pairs of
BNC connectors (typical)

User’s
Distribution
Frame

Part Number: 101-901415-002


For Unbalanced Operation Only
(For 16 E1, requires 2 BNC panels)

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Putting the Radio into Service 3-51

Figure 3-37: Tributary Connection Example: Using the 50-Pin


Amphenol to BNC Cable Assembly. Connect the
Amphenol connector on the assembly to the
TRIBUTARIES (1-8) connector on the SPU. And, using
75 Ω coaxial cables with male BNC connectors at the
SPU-end and connectors that you have chosen at the
other, connect the female BNC connectors on the cable
assembly to your equipment. The inputs and outputs
are labeled on the female BNC connectors.

INSTALLATION
User’s
Distribution
Frame
Female to Male BNC Connection
(Unbalanced Operation)

8 E1 Option
Shown Here

For Unbalanced Operation Only

50-Pin Amphenol to BNC Cable Assembly

Length, Part Number Capacity


ft.
1.5 087-901346-001 2/4 E1, Unbalanced
1.5 087-901346-002 8 E1, Unbalanced
9 087-901346-003 2/4 E1, Unbalanced
9 087-901346-004 8 E1, Unbalanced

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-52 Installation

Figure 3-38: Tributary Connection Example:


Using Wire Wrap Adapters. Referring to the pin-
out in figure 3-A, wire-wrap the tributary lines from
your equipment to the wire-wrap adapters. At your
equipment use connectors that you have chosen. Then
connect the wire-wrap adapters to the TRIBUTARIES
(1-8) and TRIBUTARIES (9-16) ports on the balanced
or unbalanced operation.

Wire-Wrap Adapter (1 required per 8 E1)


Part Number: 098-020016-260
For Balanced or Unbalanced Operation

User’s
Distribution
Frame

Note: When using


shielded twisted pairs,
we recommend that
the shield be grounded
at one point only, to
avoid ground loops.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Putting the Radio into Service 3-53

Figure 3-39: Tributary Connection Example:


Using the Connectorized Cable. Connect the
2 Amphenol connectors, one to TRIBUTARIES (1-8)
port, and another to TRIBUTARIES (9-16) port on the
balanced SPU. At the other end of each cable, install
your own connector or wire-wrap the bare wires to
your equipment. A label at the user’s end of the cable
indicates which tributaries the bare wires connect to.
For the cable lengths, see table below.
One connectorized

INSTALLATION
cable required per
8 tributaries
(typical)

User’s
Distribution
Connectorized Cable Assembly Frame

Length, ft. Part Number Capacity


32.5 098-901250-001
10 098-901250-002 Up to 8 E1,
Balanced per
20 098-901250-003 cable assembly
30 098-901250-004

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-54 Installation

Figure 3-40: Tributary Connection Example:


Using the DS3 SPU. Using 75 Ω coaxial cables with
male BNC connectors at the SPU-end, connect the
female BNC connectors of the same cables to your
equipment. The cable diagram shown below identifies
each connection label on the SPU.

User’s
Distribution
Frame

DS3-IN1

DS3-OUT1

Designation
corresponding to
BNC connector label
on the SPU

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


4
C H A P T E R

OPERATION
The user monitors and operates the MicroStar® radio by means of a power
switch, one LED indicator, a number of relays, a number of external alarm

OPERATION
inputs, and one or more data channels. The data channels communicate with
software agents or embedded control software that indirectly give the operator
access to various internal control, status and configuration points

The Power Switch

The power switch, located on the left side of each of the Signal Processing Unit’s
(SPU) and the Protection Unit’s faceplates, switches power on or off at the
input to the internal DC to DC converter. It also incorporates a fuse to cut
power in case of an overcurrent.

The SPU must be turned on first, before the PU is


turned on. Otherwise alarms will arise

After turning off the SPU or the PU you must wait


at least 30 seconds before turning the unit on
again.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-2 OPERATION

The LED Indicator

One LED, labelled ALM, (Alarm), is located on the faceplate of both the SPU
and PU. Refer to table 5-1 for a detailed description of the indicator conditions.

The Internal Alarm Relays

This refers to the internal MicroStar® alarms. In this radio, these relays are
distributed as follows:
• Both the SPU and PU have 4 hard coded relays each, for SUM Alarm,
ODU Alarm, Equipment alarm, and cable alarm. Refer to table 4-1 for
their description.

The External Alarm Inputs

The RELAYS/ALARMS port allows for 4 inputs on the SPU and 4 inputs on
the PU, for alarm or status signals from external equipment at the site (client).
The state of these lines can be monitored with the operator control device or by
a system controls device such as a FarScan™ or SNMP terminal. The user
could, for example, use one of these lines to remotely monitor a fuel-low alarm
from a diesel generator. A ground or 0V on an input represents an active alarm.
Five volts or an open input represents no alarm. Figure 3-29 gives the pin
numbers for these external alarm inputs.

Table 4-1: RELAYS/ALARMS Port — Internal Alarm Relays Description

Contacts
Relay
Pin Description
5 Common contact
Sum Alarm Relay: Open with respect to the common contact when the alarm is
18
de-energized when any inactive
alarm is active
Closed with respect to the common contact when the alarm is
6
inactive

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-5

1 Install the antenna

Tools and material required


• See antenna installation instructions.

Follow the instructions of the antenna manufacturer


that are enclosed with the antenna for the exact details

INSTALLATION
of how to assemble, install, and align the antenna.
Drawings shown here of the antenna assembly are for
reference only and are intended to simply show the
order in which the antenna and the ODU are assembled.

1. Following the instructions in the instruction sheet that is enclosed with the
antenna, assemble and install the antenna on the pole. Since the type of
antenna to use is not known, we cannot provide more detailed
information. The antenna assembly drawings shown here are typical and
are intended to simply show the order in which the antenna and ODU are
assembled. Your antenna may be different.
2. When mounting the antenna, point it as closely as possible at the
coordinating site. If you can not see the coordinating site, use a compass
and map to roughly align the antenna. A more precise alignment will be
done later in ’Putting the Radio into Service’ on page 3-40.
3. While the antenna is on the ground, set the antenna for horizontal or
vertical polarization according to the transmission engineering
requirements of the hop. Follow the antenna manufacture’s instructions.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-6 INSTALLATION

2 Install the optional sun shield

Tools and material required


• Screw driver
A sun shield is required if the ODU is to operate in direct sunlight and the
ambient temperatures exceed 35-38 °C. Where required, install the optional
sun shield as shown in figure 3-3.
Figure 3-3: Installing the optional sun shield on the ODU
1. Screw the two spacers (P/N: 026-020010-705) into the tabs on the bottom
of the ODU.
2. Insert the hooks on the back of the ODU through the corresponding slots
in the sun shield.
3. Attach the ODU to the sun shield with the screws at the top of the ODU.
4. Screw the sun shield to the spacers.
5. Screw the bottom of the ODU to the bottom of the sun shield.

PN: 026-020010-705

1 PN: 026-020010-705

2 5
2

2
5
4

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-7

3 Install the ODU mounting hardware

Tools and material required


• Screw driver
Install the mounting hardware on the ODU as shown in figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4: Installing the ODU Mounting Hardware

INSTALLATION
19 to 22 N • m
(14 to16 lbf-ft.)
2 ODU
ALL NUTS

1. ODU
2. Threaded rod (P/N: 025-901833-001)
3. Bracket (P/N: 020-901794-001)
4. Flat washer (P/N: 025-020007-704)
5. Split (lock) washer
(P/N:025-094453-502) 1
6. Nut (P/N: 025-094453-505)

6 5 4 3

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-8 INSTALLATION

4 Install the optional ODU installation tool

Tools and material required


• 2 adjustable wrenches
The installation tool supports the ODU while it is being attached to the mast.
Install the mounting tool on the mast as shown in figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5: Installing the Optional ODU Installation Tool
(Kit Part Number 098-901202-001)

1
2
3
6

5
4
3
2
1

1. Nut (P/N: 025-094453-505)


2. Split (lock) washer (P/N: 025-094453-502)
3. Flat washer (P/N: 025-020007-704)
4. Threaded rod (P/N: 025-020014-766)
5. Bracket (P/N: 020-901279-001)
6. Hook

1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9

4
The threaded rod must not protrude
more than 6 mm (0.25”) maximum

!
6 mm (0.25”)
maximum

Antenna mast
pole
114 mm (4.5”) ∅ maximum
64 mm (2.5”) ∅ minimum

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-9

5 Hang the ODU on the installation tool

Tools and material required


• Rope with safety hook
Attach a strong rope to the hoist point shown in figure 3-6, hoist the ODU up
the mast, and hang it on the installation tool as shown in the same figure. If the
sun shield is installed, open the top lid to access the hoist point.

Figure 3-6: Hoisting the ODU up to the Antenna.

INSTALLATION
ODU hoist point

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-10 INSTALLATION

Figure 3-7: Hang the ODU on the Installation Tool

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-11

6 Mount the ODU on the antenna mast

Tools and material required


• 2 adjustable wrenches
Figure 3-8: Mounting the ODU on the Antenna Mast

INSTALLATION
1

1. Bracket (P/N: 020-901794-001)


2. Flat washer (P/N: 025-020007-704)
3. Split (lock) washer
(P/N:025-094453-502)
4. Nut (P/N: 025-094453-505)

19 to 22 N • m
(14 to16 lbf-ft.) 4
ALL NUTS
3
2

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-12 Installation

7 Remove the ODU installation tool


INSTALLATION

Tools and material required


• 2 adjustable wrenches
Figure 3-9: Removing the ODU installation tool

Remove the ODU


installation tool

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-13

8 Connect the ODU to the antenna

This step does not apply to an Integrated Antenna


Configuration.

Tools and material required

INSTALLATION
• 2 adjustable wrenches
Use a length of twistable-flexible waveguide to connect the ODU to the
antenna. Be sure to use the right type of waveguide and flanges for the
frequency options of the ODU. See table 3-2.

Table 3-2: Waveguide Flange Type

Frequency Flange Type


• CPR112 Grooved flange all open for 8/32 screws
7/8 GHz
(0.170 in / 4.3mm dia.)
13 GHz • WR75, all tapped for 6-32 screws, choke
15 Ghz • WR62, all tapped for 6-32 screws (UG-541 A/U), choke
• WR42 choke, all tapped for 4-40 screws
18 GHz
• (UG-596 A/U)

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-14 Installation

Figure 3-10: Connecting the waveguide between the ODU and


the antenna

Install the twistable


flexible waveguide
in such a way that
it will not rub against
hard objects in wind

An ODU configured as an unprotected repeater has two


antenna ports, and uses two antennas. One transceiver
in the ODU is used for the west direction antenna, while
the other transceiver in the same ODU is used for the
east direction antenna. Two SPUs are used in this
configuration.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-15

9 Install the coaxial cable from the ODU to the SPU

Tools and material required


• Adjustable wrench
• Multimeter
• Coaxial cable with connector
• Tie-wraps or other means of supporting coaxial cable along run
• Sealing kit

INSTALLATION
This Step applies to the Integrated Antenna-ODU as
well, (Refer to Figures 3-12 and 3-13). A protected
radio has an SPU and a PU. Install coaxial cables from
each of these units to the ODU, one for Channel-A (SPU)
and one for Channel-B (PU).

1. Following the instructions that come with the connector, install a


connector on one end of the coaxial cable that is to go from the ODU to the
SPU.
Figure 3-11: Installing the connector on the cable

FOLLOW MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

2. Verify that the resistance between the coaxial cable’s center connector and
the shield is more than 100 Ω.
3. Verify that the SPU’s power switch is off.
4. Connect the connectorized end of the coaxial cable to the ODU.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-16 Installation

Figure 3-12: Integrated Antenna Assembly —


MicroStar® 7/8 GHz Radio

ANTENNA ASSEMBLY
(REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS)

INTERFACE PLATE

RECEPTACLE KIT (OPTIONAL:


HORIZONTAL POLARISATION ROTATOR)

ODU

Figure 3-13: Integrated Antenna Assembly —


MicroStar® M 13/15/18 GHz Radio
ANTENNA ASSEMBLY
(REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS)

INTERFACE PLATE

(OPTIONAL: HORIZONTAL POLARISATION ROTATOR)

RECEPTACLE KIT

ODU

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-17

Figure 3-14: Connecting the Coaxial Cable to the ODU

Bottom View

INSTALLATION
Ground
Lug Channel A

Tie-wraps

Sealing Sealing
Kit Kit
Channel B

Description Comments Part Number


Foam core 50 Ω heliax Cable only, XX0 =
shielded cable 210m to 300M in 10 M 087-099499-XX0
(Andrews LDF2-50) increments
45M Kit contains low loss 099-901208-001
Low loss 90M RG 8/U cable, sealing 099-901208-002
50 Ω kit, 2 N-type
RG 8/U kit 150M connectors, and 3 099-901208-003
210M grounding kits. 099-901208-004

5. Following the instructions in the sealing kit, waterproof the connection to


the ODU.
6. Run the coaxial cable from the ODU to the SPU or the place where the SPU
will be. Attach the coaxial cable to supports as required and bring it
indoors through a water proof entry.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-18 Installation

Figure 3-15: Typical Cable Run

Waterproof
Entry

Support Coaxial Cable

Leave Bare Cable End


Near SPU Position

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-19

10 Ground the ODU and the Coaxial Cable

Tools and material required


• Common tools
• Three or more grounding kits

SAFETY REQUIREMENT
Connect the ODU ground lug to earth ground.

INSTALLATION
Do not connect it to the electrical utility ground.

For a protected radio, ground both coaxial cables.

Ground the ODU as shown in figure 3-16.


Use the grounding kits to ground the coaxial cable at the ODU, the SPU and on
the antenna side of any right angle turns.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-20 Installation

Figure 3-16: Grounding the ODU and the Coaxial Cable

Coaxial grounding kits are


not required for an
indoor installation;
however, both the ODU
and the rack must be
connected to a good
common grounding point.

Coaxial Grounding Kits

Tie-wraps
Secure ground wire as required Bottom View
Ground
Lug Channel A

Install coaxial grounding kits at the ODU,


on the antenna side of every right angle
turn, and at the entry to the shelter

Channel B

3.26mm Diameter (8AWG)


Multistrand Copper Cable

Coaxial Grounding Kits


Common Grounding Point

Coaxial Grounding Kits

For a roof-top installation, connect to the building ground, or the water


supply pipe just before it enters the building. For a tower installation, connect
to a good ring ground system made from buried copper cables and rods.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-21

11 Installing the ODU indoors

Although the ODU is designed to be mounted outdoors close to the antenna, it


can be mounted indoors on the rack with the SPU, if required.
Tools and material required
• Common tools
• Waveguide pressurizing equipment

Where required, install the ODU indoors

INSTALLATION
1. Using the screws and clips provided, attach the rack mounting bracket to
the rack. We recommend putting it in rack mounting spaces 23 through 32.
Remember that, because of the waveguide, nothing should go in the rack
above radio. (See figure 3-17).
2. Attach the ODU to the bracket by inserting the hooks on the back of the
ODU into the slots provided for them on the bracket. (See figure 3-18).
3. Secure the ODU to the bracket by screwing the four captive retaining
screws on the ODU into the threaded holes provide on the bracket.
4. Run rigid or helical waveguide from the antenna to a point above the rack.
Support and ground the waveguide as required. We recommend that you
pressurize the waveguide with dry air as well. (See figure 3-19).
5. Connect the ODUs antenna port to the rigid wave guide with a short length
of flexible twistable waveguide. If possible, do NOT support the flexible
twistable waveguide.

If you have to support the twistable waveguide. Refer to


the cautionary note in figure 3-19.

6. Ground the ODU by running a separate grounding wire from the ODU to
the site’s main ground point. Do not use the same grounding wire as the
SPU.
7. If the SPU has already been installed, connect the ODU to the SPU or
SPU/PU with one or two short lengths of coaxial cable.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-22 Installation

Figure 3-17: Mount the rack-mounting bracket to the rack or


cabinet

Mount in 9 rack spaces


23 through 32
(Recommended)
(Use screws and clips provided)

Figure 3-18: Mount the ODU on the rack-mounting bracket

Captive Screws (4)

Hooks (4)

Ventilated ODU shown


(for MicroStar® 7/8
GHz with HPA option)

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the ODU 3-23

Figure 3-19: Install waveguide between a rack or cabinet-


mounted ODU and the antenna

Waveguide Support

Important:
If you need to
support the flexible
waveguide, be very
Rigid or Helical Waveguide
careful, since it can to Antenna
be easily damaged.

INSTALLATION
Use loosely tied
twine or some other Typical pressure
connection
material that will not
bend or compress the
waveguide. Flexible Waveguide

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-24 Installing the SPU and PU

Installing the SPU and PU


INSTALLATION

Table 3-3: Equipment and Tools required

Required equipment
Tool specifications Where used

Screwdrivera Phillips #2 General


Multimeter With ohm meter
Miscellaneous tools • "Connect the Coaxial Cables
for installing Refer to the manufacturer to the SPU and PU"
connectors on the documentation provided with the on page 3-28
SPU to ODU coaxial connector.
cable.
a. Part of an optionally available tool kit, part number 098-093607-027.

Figure 3-20: Parts for SPU Installation

SPU
Tie-Wraps or Cable Clamps
to Support Cables

Although most of the following figures show only the


SPU, this installation procedure applies to the PU as
well.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the SPU and PU 3-25

1 Configure the SPU mounting hardware

Tools and material required


• A number 2 cross-head screw driver
1. For flush mounting in a rack, replace the standard brackets by the optional
longer brackets, as shown in figure 3-21. (The SPU ships with standard
brackets allowing the front of the SPU to extend past the front of the rack).

Figure 3-21: Installing Brackets for Flush Mounting in a Rack

INSTALLATION
Remove standard brackets

Align holes in the longer bracket


with those on the SPU

All cable routings depicted in the following installation


steps are shown for illustration purposes only.
In order to easily replace a unit, ensure that all cables
are routed from the rack sides and at the level of their
respective connectors. Doing so, allows you to replace a
unit with the least operation disruption.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-26 Installation

2 Install the SPU in the rack

Tools and material required


• A number-2 cross-head screw driver
Secure the SPU to the rack with the screws provided, as shown in figure 3-22.
The position will depend on your situation and what other equipment you have
or plan to have in the rack.

Mount the SPU in a rack ONLY over a non-


combustible material.

Figure 3-22: Secure SPU Brackets to Rack

Allow at least 2 RMS in


this area for easier unit
replacement

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the SPU and PU 3-27

3 Install the optional BNC connector panels (E1)

Tools and material required


• A number-2 cross-head screw driver
Install one connector panel for each group of 8 tributaries.
Refer to figure 3-23.
Figure 3-23: BNC Connector Panels (16 E1 Option shown here)

INSTALLATION
Part Number
101-901415-002
(2 required for
16 E1 Capacity)

See Note below.

Ensure aligning the pins of each SCSI connector/port


before insertion. Install FIRST the bottom connector
(PU), then pull strongly on the cable for properly
aligning the connector pins on the top SCSI port (SPU)
before insertion. Then, finger tighten the fine screws.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-28 Installation

4 Connect the Coaxial Cables to the SPU and PU

Tools and material required


• Common tools
• A multimeter
• An N-type connector compatible with the type of coaxial cable that you
are using.

If the ODU has already been installed you should find the end of the
interconnect cable near the SPU. If the ODU has not been installed,
ignore this step.
1. Cut the cable to a length which will leave about 6 inches (15 cm) of slack
after it has been connected to the SPU and PU.
2. Following the instructions that come with the connector, install an N-type
connector on each cable.
3. Using the multimeter, check that the resistance between the coaxial cable’s
center connector and the shield is more than 100 Ω, with the far end
connected to the ODU.

A lower resistance value indicates that there is a


short in the coaxial cable or in the ODU that may
damage the SPU’s switch (fuse) when it is
switched ON. If this is the case, replace the faulty
element (cable or ODU).

4. Connect the cables to the CBL ports on the SPU and PU.
5. Support the cable if necessary.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the SPU and PU 3-29

Figure 3-24: Connecting the Coaxial Cable to the SPU and PU


Bring cable trough
waterproof entry

INSTALLATION
Support cable
as required

Leave Slack

Resistance between the coaxial cable’s


center connector and the shield must be
more than 100 Ω

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-30 Installation

5 Ground the SPU and PU

Tools and material required


• A number-2 cross-head screw driver
Ground the SPU and PU by connecting 3.26 mm (8 AWG) copper cable from
the grounding point on the left rack-mounting bracket to the radio system’s
main grounding point. For a roof-top installation, the main grounding point
could be the building ground, or the water supply pipe just before it enters the
building. For a tower installation it should be a good ring ground system made
from buried copper cables and rods. Do NOT connect to the electrical utility
ground.

Safety Requirements for Grounding


1. It is very important that the path of lowest impedance go directly to the
main grounding point.
2. Do not connect other equipment to the same grounding cable as the SPU.
Each piece of equipment at the site should have a separate grounding cable
to a common very low impedance main grounding point.
3. Locate this equipment in the same immediate area (adjacent cabinets) as
any other equipment that has a connection between the earthed conductor
of the same d.c. supply circuit and the earthing conductor, and also the
point of earthing of the d.c. system. DO NOT earth the d.c. system
elsewhere.
4. Connect this equipment directly to the d.c. supply system earthing
electrode conductor or to a bonding jumper from an earthing terminal bar,
or bus to which the d.c. supply earthing electrode is connected.
5. Locate the d.c. supply source within the same premises as the equipment.
6. There shall be no switching or disconnecting devices in the earthed circuit
conductor between the d.c. source and the point of connection of the
earthing electrode conductor.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the SPU and PU 3-31

6 Connect power to the SPU and PU

Connect the power supply as shown in figure 3-25. Check that the junction-
block screws are tight enough to hold the power wires securely in place, then set
the SPU (and PU) switch to the I (ON) position.
If you have purchased the optional fuse panel see figure 3-26 for installation
instructions for it.
Figure 3-25: Power Connections

Kit Part No. 099-902158-001

INSTALLATION
(Follow cable/connector assembly
instructions supplied in the Kit)

SPU Safety Requirement


! Use one fuse per SPU

Power source A:
required ±21 to 60 Vdc

PU 10 A Slow Blow Battery


±21 TO 60 Vdc
Positive or
Negative Ground

Power source B:
Alternate required ±21 to 60 Vdc
Grounding Point
10 A Slow Blow Battery
±21 TO 60 Vdc
Positive or
Negative Ground
Ground wire
(10 mm2, 8 AWG)

Safety Requirement:
! Connect to earth ground.
Common Grounding Point Do not connect to the
(see step-18) electrical utility ground.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-32 Installation

Figure 3-26: Connecting the Optional Fuse Panel


Rack with Fuse Panel

Stick peg holders on panel above fuse slots


Insert colored pegs to indicate value of corresponding fuses
Connect to PU +/- terminal
Connect to PU terminal

From PU Battery Connect to grounded rack

Connect to SPU +/- terminal


Connect to SPU terminal
From SPU’s Battery

Insert fuses
Use 10A slow blow GMT type fuse
Keep fuse blanks in unused positions
If required, connect
alarm equipment
Stick fuse usage to alarm relays here
labels to panel

POS LOCATION
To SPU To Alarm

To Common
Ground Point
Check that wire is on
this side of clamp

Use small screwdriver


Turn clockwise to tighten

Install junction covers when finished

Connect the terminal labelled BATT to the


battery terminal that is not grounded
Connect the terminal labelled RTN to the
battery terminal that is grounded

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the SPU and PU 3-33

7 Connect remote communications equipment,


as required

Tools and material required


• Common tools
Multi-hop systems usually require some way to communicate with and control
equipment at remote sites. The MicroStar® radio allows you to do this with a
telephone link, a data link to third party RTUs, and/or a FarScan™ or SNMP
data link. Depending on your needs, connect this equipment as shown in
figure 3-27.

INSTALLATION
The DATA channel is configured as DCE only. Use a null
modem to connect it to DCE equipment.

Figure 3-27: Connecting Remote Communications Equipment


RPTR (IN) R TRIB 1 - 8

10BASE-T
DATA (RS-232) RELAYS / ALARMS
FUSE 8A SB TRIB 9 - 16

CBL BAT +/- ALM TERMINAL NMS PROTECTION


RPTR (OUT) PCMCIA

FUSE 8A SB

CBL BAT +/- ALM PROTECTION RELAYS / ALARMS

Connect network cable


Connect serial data with RJ45 connector for
communications to Ethernet-IP connection for
or from third party Web CIT and FTP
control equipment
Use this port with one
DATA (RS-232) or two PCMCIA PC 10BASE-T
Cards for connecting
DCD_DAT 1 FarScan™, and
DSR_DAT
DAT_RX
6
2
optional orderwire.
CTS_DAT 7 Please see "Installing
DAT_TX 3
CTS_DAT 8 PCMCIA cards" on page
DTR_DAT 4
+5VB 9 3-37 for instructions on
GROUND 5 NMS
installing PCMCIA cards
and installing cables.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-34 Installation

8 Connect other SPUs in repeater or spur


configuration

Tools and material required


• Common tools
• Network cables, RJ45, 10Base-T compliant, length as required:
- 1 for repeater
- 1 for protected repeater
- 2 for repeater with spur
If the radio you are installing is part of a repeater, or a repeater with a spur,
connect the RPTR (IN) and RPTR (OUT) connectors together as shown below.
Figure 3-28: Connecting the Network Channel between SPUs
in a Repeater Configuration
(Repeater with Spur Shown)

RPTR (IN) R TRIB 1 - 8

10BASE-T
DATA (RS-232) RELAYS / ALARMS
FUSE 8A SB TRIB 9 - 16

CBL BAT +/- ALM TERMINAL NMS PROTECTION


RPTR (OUT) PCMCIA

Part No. 087-020193-xxx.


(Refer to table 6-1 for details)

RPTR (IN) R TRIB 1 - 8

10BASE-T
DATA (RS-232) RELAYS / ALARMS
FUSE 8A SB TRIB 9 - 16

CBL BAT +/- ALM TERMINAL NMS PROTECTION


RPTR (OUT) PCMCIA

RPTR (IN) R TRIB 1 - 8

10BASE-T
DATA (RS-232) RELAYS / ALARMS
FUSE 8A SB TRIB 9 - 16

CBL BAT +/- ALM TERMINAL NMS PROTECTION


RPTR (OUT) PCMCIA

The repeater (IN/OUT) connections provide protection


for the service channels, as well as network data and
customer data on SPUs.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the SPU and PU 3-35

9 If required, connect alarm relays and auxiliary


alarm inputs

Tools and material required


• Common tools
If you need to connect the MicroStar’s relays to a third party RTU or other
equipment, or if you want to connect external alarms to the MicroStar’s alarm
monitoring points: do so as shown in figure 3-29.
Figure 3-29: Connections for Relays and Customer-

INSTALLATION
Generated Alarms
RPTR (IN) R TRIB 1 - 8

10BASE-T
DATA (RS-232) RELAYS / ALARMS
FUSE 8A SB TRIB 9 - 16

CBL BAT +/- ALM TERMINAL NMS PROTECTION


RPTR (OUT) PCMCIA

FUSE 8A SB

CBL BAT +/- ALM PROTECTION RELAYS / ALARMS

Relays are de-energized when alarm is active


and are rated for 300 ma @ 60Vdc.
The auxiliary alarm inputs are compatible with Connect to alarm relays here.
CMOS logic levels: an input of 2.5V or higher See corresponding software alarm
is interpreted as a high logic level. descriptions to know alarm function.

(pin out descriptions shown on opposite page)

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-36 Installation

SPU’S RELAYS/ALARMS PORT

Pin Description
1 Ground
14 No Connection
2 No Connection
15 No Connection
3 No Connection
16 No Connection
4 No Connection
17 No Connection
5 SUM alarm common Sum Alarm
18 Open = No SUM alarm
6 Closed = No SUM alarm Relay
19 SPU alarm common SPU Alarm
7 Open = No SPU alarm
Relay
20 Closed = No SPU alarm
8 ODU alarm common ODU Alarm
21 Open = No ODU alarm
9 Closed = No ODU alarm Relay
22 Cable alarm common Cable Alarm
10 Open = No Cable alarm
23 Closed = No Cable alarm Relay
11 Input Alarm 1, active low
24 Input Alarm 2, active low
12 Input Alarm 3, active low
25 Input Alarm 4, active low
13 Ground

PU’S RELAYS/ALARMS PORT

Pin Description
1 Ground
14 No Connection
2 No Connection
15 No Connection
3 No Connection
16 No Connection
4 No Connection
17 No Connection
5 SUM alarm common Sum Alarm
18 Open = No SUM alarm
6 Closed = No SUM alarm Relay
19 PU alarm common PU Alarm
7 Open = No PU alarm
Relay
20 Closed = No PU alarm
8 ODU alarm common ODU Alarm
21 Open = No ODU alarm
9 Closed = No ODU alarm Relay
22 Cable alarm common Cable Alarm
10 Open = No Cable alarm
23 Closed = No Cable alarm Relay
11 Input Alarm 5, active low
24 Input Alarm 6, active low
12 Input Alarm 7, active low
25 Input Alarm 8, active low
13 Ground

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the SPU and PU 3-37

10 Installing PCMCIA cards

Tools and material required


• Common tools
The Type-II IDU currently supports two optional PCMCIA cards: The
orderwire card and a dual RS-232 card used to connect to FarScan. If you have
purchased one or both of these PCMCIA cards you will receive them as
separately packaged kits that you will have to install. The contents, names, and
part numbers of these kits are as follows

INSTALLATION
• PCMCIA CBL 2 CHANNEL RS-232, FARSCAN Port,
P/N 099-902203-001
- Dual Serial Port PCMCIA card
- Dual channel RS-233 dongle (includes two separate ferrites)
- Cable Null Modem P/N 087-900468-001
• KIT OW PCMCIA SPU TYPE II, Orderwire, P/N 099-902001-001
- Orderwire PCMCIA card P/N 101-902180-001
- Cable RJ-11/RJ45 P/N 087-902211-011
- Cable Phone EMI P/N 087-902008-001
1. Insert the PCMCIA card — label side facing UP — in the upper slot (A) if
it is empty. If the upper slot is occupied, insert the PCMCIA card into the
lower slot (B).
2. Using the hand-held terminal or Web-CIT, from the menu
SHUTDOWN / SHUTDOWN REASON, enter RESET. You need also to
specify a non-zero value for the shutdown DELAY.

This does not impact traffic in any way. A reset is


required for the SPU to recognize the PCMCIA card and
allow access to the orderwire functions.
To access these functions at any site, you need one
PCMCIA card. We recommend purchasing ONE card per
10 terminals (or a minimum of 2 cards) per network.

3. Connect the cables from the kit to the PCMCIA card as shown in figures 3-
31 and 3-30.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-38 Installation

4. Referring to chapter 4, configure the interface.


For the Serial FARCAN connection
For the channel that you are using for the FARSCAN connection, select
COMPUTER as the protocol, and select the desired speed. Select Disabled
as the protocol for the other channel.
The HHT path is Configuration ⇒ IDU ⇒ PCMCIA ⇒ Dual Serial Port
For the orderwire
You can use the 4-wire port to interface with the service channels of older
Harris equipment or you can use it to connect to an external third party
orderwire unit. If you are using the 4-wire port, you must enable it. If you
are not using the 4-wire port, disable it. If you enable the 4-wire port, select
the In/Out level to be -16/7 dBm or 0/0 dBm.
The HHT path is Configuration ⇒ IDU ⇒ PCMCIA ⇒ Service channel.
Figure 3-30: FARSCAN Port, (EMI Compliant)

(2 ferrites Dual-channel RS-232


provided) Cable
Install the ferrites in this
section of the cable

Attach the cable assembly to the IDU


be means of the plastic strap

RS-232 Ports

This cable is EMI-Compliant to


Class A. An SPU that is not Connect one of these
equipped with a PCMCIA card is connectors to the
EMI-Compliant to Class B. FASCAN channel by
means of the null
modem cable.

To/From
FARSCAN
Equipment Null modem cable P/N 087-900468-001

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Installing the SPU and PU 3-39

Figure 3-31: Orderwire and 10BASE-T Cable, (EMI Compliant)

PCMCIA Card inserted


Arrow is up for correct
orientation of connector

INSTALLATION
Cable RJ-11/RJ-45,
This cable is EMI- P/N 087-902211-001
Compliant to Class A.
An SPU that is not
equipped with a
PCMCIA card is EMI-
Compliant to Class B.

Telephone
(by Harris or others)

2W port 4W port
RJ-11 RJ-45

RJ-11 EMI phone cable


with 240 Ω Ferrite Core

The telephone number used by the orderwire is the


same as the unit’s NE address. See "The NE Address" on
page 4-29.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-40 Installation

Putting the Radio into Service


INSTALLATION

Table 3-4: Equipment and Tools required

Tool Required Equipment Specifications


Digital voltmeter 3-digit; 0.3% dc accuracy; 2% ac accuracy; 0 to 60 V range
• Hand Held Terminal
A operator interface device or
• VT-100 compatible Terminal
Pattern depends on the tributary rate and format of the
Bit error rate test set (BERT) microwave radio (CEPT or North American). HP-3784A or
equivalent.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Putting the Radio into Service 3-41

1 Connect the operator control device

Tools and material required


• Operator control device:
- A VT-100 compatible terminal such as our hand-held terminal
keypad
• Cable for operator control device
Connect a PC, a VT-100 compatible terminal, or a hand-held terminal to the
TERMINAL port on the front of the SPU, as shown in figure 3-32.

RADIO WORK
MAKING THE
Figure 3-32: Connecting an Operator Control Device

OR

TERMINAL

Pin Description
1 DTR_DIS
6 DSR_DIS
2 DIS_Rx
7 RTS_DIS
3 DIS_Tx
8 CTS_DIS
4
9
5
DTR_DIS
+5 Vdc
GROUND
Only one cable is required Cable
part number: 087-900271-480

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-42 Installation

2 Establish a radio link

Tools and material required


• Operator control device:
- A VT-100 compatible terminal such as our hand-held terminal
• Cable for operator control device

Before starting this step you must know what receive


frequency and transmit frequency have been assigned
to both the local and coordinating radios. You must also
have an assistant at the coordinating site.

1. Check that the coordinating site has also been installed up to this point
(Establish a radio link).

In the following steps you will use the embedded control


software (VT-100, or hand-held terminal) or Web CIT to
configure several parameters in both the local and
coordinating radio. Refer to Chapter 4 of this manual for
general information on the subject.

2. Switch ON power to the radio: first the SPU, then the PU, in a protected
system.
3. In the CONFIGURATION / ODU menu, at both the local and coordinating
radios, set the transmit frequencies of the radios to the values that have
been assigned to them (in steps of 125 kHz, for the MicroStar® 7/8 GHz
and 250 kHz for the MicroStar® 13/15/18 GHz). The transmit frequency of
the coordinating radio must be the same as the receive frequency of the
local radio.
4. Check that you have not a SYNC LOSS alarm on the operator control. If
this alarm is present, adjust the antenna position at both the local and the
coordinating site until it disappears.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Putting the Radio into Service 3-43

3 Fine-align the antenna

Tools and material required


• Voltmeter with probes
• Adjustable wrench
1. Adjust the direction of the antenna until you have a maximum AGC
voltage1 at the AGC test points connector on the front of the transceiver as
shown in figure 3-33.
2. When finished, latch the ODU door, tighten the two screws on the door to

INSTALLATION
1.6 N.m (14.4 lb.in) to prevent water infiltration.
3. Clear all forced traffic controls (return to automatic protection switching).
Figure 3-33: Fine Antenna Alignment

AGC
Connection
Note: The Alignment method shown
V
here is typical. Refer to the antenna
VOLTMETER
V
manufacturer’s instructions to know
how to adjust the azimuth and
+ – elevation on your antenna.
In the case of the integrated antenna,
refer to the instructions that
Transceiver accompany the antenna.
(Located within the ODU)

VAGC

Secondary
AGC Voltage Peaks Maximum Peak Resulting
from Side-Lobes Angle from Antenna Alignment
to the Main Lobe

1. The AGC voltage is a positive voltage

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-44 Installation

4 Finish configuring the radio

Tools and material required


• Operator control device:
- A lap-top PC with Web-CIT software
or
- A VT-100 compatible terminal such as our hand-held terminal
• Cable for operator control device
At this point you must know how the radio is to be configured: frequency,
capacity, line code, baud rates, etc. Refer to Appendix B for guidance.
Using the operator control device configure the radio. In a protected system
configure both channels. If required refer to Chapter 4, Appendix B, and
Appendix C for information on how to set the configuration parameters using
the hand held terminal. If you are using the Web-CIT software, you will find the
configuration points in the General Configuration Window and Tributary
Window.
1. Enable the number of tributaries that you will be using.
2. Set the unique NE address for each SPU.
3. If you will be using the DATA port, set its baud rate.
4. Enable (ENABLE) the tributaries that you will be using.
5. Set the line equalizer for the tributaries that you will be using.
6. Select the line code for the tributaries that you will be using.
7. Enable or disable the AIS threshold as required.
8. Select the BER threshold.
9. If you will be using the SNMP feature set SNMP parameters: NMS IP
ADRS, and ALT NMS IP ADRS.
10. If you have the optional orderwire set the voice frequency in/out level.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Putting the Radio into Service 3-45

5 Perform a long count

Tools and material required


• Operator control device:
- A lap-top PC with Web-CIT software
or
- A VT-100 compatible terminal such as our hand-held terminal
• Cable for operator control device
• BERT with cables

INSTALLATION
• Cables to loop back signal so that several channels can be tested at once.
The cable ends must match the connectors on your tributary interface:
BNC or wire wrap.

For this procedure you must either know the NE address


of the coordinating site or have an assistant at the
coordinating site with an operator control device.

To check the system BER performance, perform a long-count on all tributary


channels. Use a bit error rate test set (BERT) to generate and insert the
transmit data stream and to detect errors, if any, in the looped-back received
data stream. See figure 3-34 for the test setup for a long count. Setup the BERT
using table 3-5 and according to your system requirements.

Table 3-5: BERT Setup

Microwave radio tributary,


kbit/s PRBS

2048 215 -1

44736 223 -1

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-46 Installation

1. Enable all tributaries at the local and coordinating site


With Web-CIT:
Set all the tributaries to ENABLE in the Control > Tributary
Configuration > Tributary window.
With embedded control software:
Set all tributaries to ENABLE in the CONFIGURATION / IDU /
TRIBUTARY / TRIBUTARY n [DISABLE / ENABLE] display menu.
2. Set all tributaries at the coordinating site to loopback.
With Web-CIT:
In the Main > Controls menu select Loopback for all tributaries.
With the embedded control software:
If you are operating remotely, in the MAIN / NE ADDRESS set the NE
address to the address of the coordinating site.
In the CONTROL / IDU menu, set TRIBUTARY LPBK n1 to SET for all
tributaries.
3. Loop tributaries at the local radio
At the local radio, using short cables, link the tributary input and output
as shown in figure 3-34. See figure 3-A for the pin out of the tributary
connectors.
4. Set the BERT generator for a PRBS signal
Use the appropriate line code and tributary data rate used by the radio
under test.
With Web-CIT:
In the System > Tributary > Tributary Configuration menu set the line
code of the tributaries to the type that your system uses.
With the embedded control software:
In the CONFIGURATION / IDU / TRIBUTARY CODE / TRIB n1
CODE menus select the correct line code for your system (T-rates only).
5. Connect the BERT generator output
to the input of the tributary 1 input.

1. ‘n’ is the number of the tributary.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Putting the Radio into Service 3-47

6. Connect the BERT receiver input


to the output of the top channel (tributary 4 if the microwave radio has 4
channels, tributary 2 if the microwave radio has 2 channels, and so on).
Requirement: The BERT receiver should indicate a bit error rate of
less than 1 × 10-12 for each hop during the test period. The test period
should be minimum six hours. There should be no single occurrence hit (a
hit is an errored second with more than 10 errors). If the error rate is
worse than 1 × 10-12 for each hop during the period, repeat the test again.
If again the bit error rate is worse than 1 × 10-12 , determine the cause of
the fault and correct the problem.

INSTALLATION
7. Disconnect the local site BERT and test cables.
Clear all of the remote loopback settings.

Figure 3-34: Test Setup for Long Count

Local Site Remote Site


Tributary 1 in
MicroStar®
Tributary 1 out MicroStar® Radio
Tributary 2 in Radio

Tributary 3 out
Tributary 4 in
BERT

Tributary n-1 out


Tributary n in

Tributary n out

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-48 Installation

6 Connect customer traffic

Tools and material required


• Cables with 50-pin male Amphenol connectors.
or
• Adapters to adapt the Amphenol connectors to some other format. For
example:
- Wire-wrap adaptors
- BNC panels
- BNC cable assemblies
(Refer to table 6-1 for spare parts numbers).
Connect the tributaries from your distribution frame to the TRIBUTARIES
(1-8) port and, for the 16 E1 version, the TRIBUTARIES (9-16) port. Refer to
the pin-out in figure 3-A. Note that the number of ports depends on the
capacity (8 E1 or 16 E1) and that the tributary impedance automatically
configures itself to match the circuit connected to the tributary.

If you do not intend to use some tributaries, set


the unused tributaries to DISABLE in the
CONFIGURATION / IDU / TRIBUTARY / TRIBUTARY n
display menu, using a VT-100 terminal. Failure to
do so will cause alarms.

To protect the public telecommunications network, an


approved isolation device must be installed between the
SPU and the public telecommunications network.

Figure 3-35: Traffic Connections


(for 2/4/8/16 E1 or T1 Capacities)

RPTR (IN) R TRIB 1 - 8

10BASE-T
DATA (RS-232) RELAYS / ALARMS
FUSE 8A SB TRIB 9 - 16

CBL BAT +/- ALM TERMINAL NMS PROTECTION


RPTR (OUT) PCMCIA

3-A 3-B

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Putting the Radio into Service 3-49

Detail 3-A: 1-8 Tributaries Port (Balanced / Unbalanced)


Description Description
Unbalanced Balanced Pin Pin Balanced Unbalanced
N.C. N.C. 1 26 N.C. N.C.
Ground Ground 2 27 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring 8 3 28 Out_tip 8 Tributary 8 Out
Ground In_ring 8 4 29 In_tip 8 Tributary 8 In
Ground Ground 5 30 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring 7 6 31 Out_tip 7 Tributary 7 Out
Ground In_ring 7 7 32 In_tip 7 Tributary 7 In
Ground Ground 8 33 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring 6 9 34 Out_tip 6 Tributary 6 Out
Ground In_ring 6 10 35 In_tip 6 Tributary 6 In
Ground Ground 11 36 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring 5 12 37 Out_tip 5 Tributary 5 Out

INSTALLATION
Ground In_ring 5 13 38 In_tip 5 Tributary 5in
Ground Ground 14 39 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring 4 15 40 Out_tip4 Tributary 4 Out
Ground In_ring 4 16 41 In_tip 4 Tributary 4 In
Ground Ground 17 42 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring 3 18 43 Out_tip 3 Tributary 3 Out
Ground In_ring 3 19 44 In_tip 3 Tributary 3 In
Ground Ground 20 45 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring 2 21 46 Out_tip2 Tributary 2 Out
Ground In_ring 2 22 47 In_tip2 Tributary 2 In
Ground Ground 23 48 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring 1 24 49 Out_tip1 Tributary 1 Out
Ground In_ring 1 25 50 In_tip1 Tributary 1 In

Detail 3-B: 9-16 Tributaries Port (Balanced / Unbalanced)

Description Description
Unbalanced Balanced Pin Pin Balanced Unbalanced
N.C. N.C. 1 26 N.C. N.C.
Ground Ground 2 27 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring16 3 28 Out_tip16 Tributary 16 Out
Ground In_ring16 4 29 In_tip16 Tributary 16 In
Ground Ground 5 30 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring15 6 31 Out_tip15 Tributary 15 Out
Ground In_ring15 7 32 In_tip15 Tributary 15 In
Ground Ground 8 33 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring14 9 34 Out_tip14 Tributary 14Out
Ground In_ring14 10 35 In_tip14 Tributary 14 In
Ground Ground 11 36 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring13 12 37 Out_tip13 Tributary 13 Out
Ground In_ring13 13 38 In_tip13 Tributary 13 in
Ground Ground 14 39 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring12 15 40 Out_tip12 Tributary 12 Out
Ground In_ring12 16 41 In_tip12 Tributary 12 In
Ground Ground 17 42 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring11 18 43 Out_tip11 Tributary 11 Out
Ground In_ring11 19 44 In_tip11 Tributary 11 In
Ground Ground 20 45 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring10 21 46 Out_tip10 Tributary 10 out
Ground In_ring10 22 47 In_tip10 Tributary 10 In
Ground Ground 23 48 Ground Ground
Ground Out_ring9 24 49 Out_tip9 Tributary 9 Out
Ground In_ring9 25 50 In_tip9 Tributary 9 In

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-50 Installation

Figure 3-36: Tributary Connection Example: Using the BNC


Interconnect Panel. Connect the Amphenol
connector from the BNC panel to the TRIBUTARIES
(1-8) and/or (9-16) ports on the SPU. And, using 75 Ω
coaxial cable with male BNC connectors at the SPU-
end and connectors that you have chosen at the other,
connect the tributary inputs and outputs on the panel
to your equipment. The inputs and outputs are labelled
on the panel.
Up to 16 pairs of
BNC connectors (typical)

User’s
Distribution
Frame

Part Number: 101-901415-002


For Unbalanced Operation Only
(For 16 E1, requires 2 BNC panels)

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Putting the Radio into Service 3-51

Figure 3-37: Tributary Connection Example: Using the 50-Pin


Amphenol to BNC Cable Assembly. Connect the
Amphenol connector on the assembly to the
TRIBUTARIES (1-8) connector on the SPU. And, using
75 Ω coaxial cables with male BNC connectors at the
SPU-end and connectors that you have chosen at the
other, connect the female BNC connectors on the cable
assembly to your equipment. The inputs and outputs
are labeled on the female BNC connectors.

INSTALLATION
User’s
Distribution
Frame
Female to Male BNC Connection
(Unbalanced Operation)

8 E1 Option
Shown Here

For Unbalanced Operation Only

50-Pin Amphenol to BNC Cable Assembly

Length, Part Number Capacity


ft.
1.5 087-901346-001 2/4 E1, Unbalanced
1.5 087-901346-002 8 E1, Unbalanced
9 087-901346-003 2/4 E1, Unbalanced
9 087-901346-004 8 E1, Unbalanced

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-52 Installation

Figure 3-38: Tributary Connection Example:


Using Wire Wrap Adapters. Referring to the pin-
out in figure 3-A, wire-wrap the tributary lines from
your equipment to the wire-wrap adapters. At your
equipment use connectors that you have chosen. Then
connect the wire-wrap adapters to the TRIBUTARIES
(1-8) and TRIBUTARIES (9-16) ports on the balanced
or unbalanced operation.

Wire-Wrap Adapter (1 required per 8 E1)


Part Number: 098-020016-260
For Balanced or Unbalanced Operation

User’s
Distribution
Frame

Note: When using


shielded twisted pairs,
we recommend that
the shield be grounded
at one point only, to
avoid ground loops.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Putting the Radio into Service 3-53

Figure 3-39: Tributary Connection Example:


Using the Connectorized Cable. Connect the
2 Amphenol connectors, one to TRIBUTARIES (1-8)
port, and another to TRIBUTARIES (9-16) port on the
balanced SPU. At the other end of each cable, install
your own connector or wire-wrap the bare wires to
your equipment. A label at the user’s end of the cable
indicates which tributaries the bare wires connect to.
For the cable lengths, see table below.
One connectorized

INSTALLATION
cable required per
8 tributaries
(typical)

User’s
Distribution
Connectorized Cable Assembly Frame

Length, ft. Part Number Capacity


32.5 098-901250-001
10 098-901250-002 Up to 8 E1,
Balanced per
20 098-901250-003 cable assembly
30 098-901250-004

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


3-54 Installation

Figure 3-40: Tributary Connection Example:


Using the DS3 SPU. Using 75 Ω coaxial cables with
male BNC connectors at the SPU-end, connect the
female BNC connectors of the same cables to your
equipment. The cable diagram shown below identifies
each connection label on the SPU.

User’s
Distribution
Frame

DS3-IN1

DS3-OUT1

Designation
corresponding to
BNC connector label
on the SPU

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


4
C H A P T E R

OPERATION
The user monitors and operates the MicroStar® radio by means of a power
switch, one LED indicator, a number of relays, a number of external alarm

OPERATION
inputs, and one or more data channels. The data channels communicate with
software agents or embedded control software that indirectly give the operator
access to various internal control, status and configuration points

The Power Switch

The power switch, located on the left side of each of the Signal Processing Unit’s
(SPU) and the Protection Unit’s faceplates, switches power on or off at the
input to the internal DC to DC converter. It also incorporates a fuse to cut
power in case of an overcurrent.

The SPU must be turned on first, before the PU is


turned on. Otherwise alarms will arise

After turning off the SPU or the PU you must wait


at least 30 seconds before turning the unit on
again.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-2 OPERATION

The LED Indicator

One LED, labelled ALM, (Alarm), is located on the faceplate of both the SPU
and PU. Refer to table 5-1 for a detailed description of the indicator conditions.

The Internal Alarm Relays

This refers to the internal MicroStar® alarms. In this radio, these relays are
distributed as follows:
• Both the SPU and PU have 4 hard coded relays each, for SUM Alarm,
ODU Alarm, Equipment alarm, and cable alarm. Refer to table 4-1 for
their description.

The External Alarm Inputs

The RELAYS/ALARMS port allows for 4 inputs on the SPU and 4 inputs on
the PU, for alarm or status signals from external equipment at the site (client).
The state of these lines can be monitored with the operator control device or by
a system controls device such as a FarScan™ or SNMP terminal. The user
could, for example, use one of these lines to remotely monitor a fuel-low alarm
from a diesel generator. A ground or 0V on an input represents an active alarm.
Five volts or an open input represents no alarm. Figure 3-29 gives the pin
numbers for these external alarm inputs.

Table 4-1: RELAYS/ALARMS Port — Internal Alarm Relays Description

Contacts
Relay
Pin Description
5 Common contact
Sum Alarm Relay: Open with respect to the common contact when the alarm is
18
de-energized when any inactive
alarm is active
Closed with respect to the common contact when the alarm is
6
inactive

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


The External Alarm Inputs 4-3

Table 4-1: RELAYS/ALARMS Port — Internal Alarm Relays Description

Contacts
Relay
Pin Description
19 Common contact
a
SPU Alarm Relay: Open with respect to the common contact when the alarm is
7
de-energized when the inactive
SPU fails
Closed with respect to the common contact when the alarm is
20
inactive
8 Common contact
ODU Alarm Relay: Open with respect to the common contact when the alarm is
21
de-energized when the inactive
corresponding ODU fails
Closed with respect to the common contact when the alarm is
9

OPERATION
inactive
22 Common contact
Cable Alarm Relay:
de-energized when Open with respect to the common contact when the alarm is
10
cable between the ODU inactive
and the SPU
Closed with respect to the common contact when the alarm is
malfunctions 23
inactive
a. In case of the PU, this relay is designated as the PU Alarm Relay

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-4 OPERATION

The Software

The main operator interface is one or more data links to embedded software or
software agents within the radios controller. The software agents provide an
interface between external control software and internal status and control
points. These agents are:
• the FarScan™ agent, which interacts with our FarScan™ network
control software.
• the SNMP agent, which interacts with many network control software
packages that use the SNMP protocol.
• The Web CIT server, which provides a web browser access to the SNMP
MIB.
The embedded control software interacts with our hand held terminal or any
other VT-100 compatible terminal.
Any one of these would be sufficient to operate the radio; however, most users
choose to use two: FarScan™ or an SNMP NMS for overall network control and
the HHT or Web CIT for installation and local control.
For information on FarScan™ please refer to the FarScan manual1.

Rebooting

You can use the shut down function to reboot or you can turn the power off and
on. If the system is protected and you choose to turn the power off and on, you
must turn off power to both the SPU and PU; then, you must turn on the SPU
followed by the PU.

1. For more information on FarScan™, refer to the FarScan™ manual or call one of Harris
representatives.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


SNMP Access 4-5

SNMP Access

The operator can use the HHT to control access to the SNMP MIB. The
embedded software provides menu items to authorize 10 SNMP clients (SNMP
management stations) to access the MIB. As well it can specify 10 SNMP clients
to which SNMP traps will be sent. Menu items also allow the operator to change
the read only and the read/write community names to restrict access as
required. Finally there is a master override control to enable or disable all write
access to the MIB.
By default the Authorized NMS feature is disabled and write permission is
enabled, allowing any SNMP client to access the MIB. The Authorized NMS
function is disable if at leased one authorization menu item has the 0.0.0.0 IP
address. If you want to use the feature but do not have 10 SNMP clients, put the

OPERATION
loopback address (127.0.0.1) in the unused authorization menu items.

The PC using the web CIT and the PC using the software
upgrade utility are SNMP clients and must be authorized
to access the MIB before they can function, either by
disabling the feature or by entering the appropriate IP
addresses by means of the HHT.

See:
"AUTHORIZED NMS N[XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX]" on page C-3
"AUTH NMS N STATUS [ENABLE / DISABLE]" on page C-3
"NOTIFIED NMS N[XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX]" on page C-15
"NTFD NMS N STATUS [ENABLE / DISABLE]" on page C-15
"RD ONLY COMMUNITY" on page C-19
"RW COMMUNITY" on page C-22
"WRITE PERMISSION [ALLOWED / DENIED]" on page C-30

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-6 OPERATION

Using Web-CIT

On the MicroStar® SPU, the 10BASE-T/NMS port allows a management station


(a laptop or deskt0p PC) to make an IP connection to the MicroStar®radio. The
PC’s web browser can then display HTML pages and run Java scripts supplied
by the a web server that resides in the radio. These HTML pages and Java
scripts provide access to the radio’s SNMP MIB, allowing the operator to
monitor and control the radio.
The management station must have at least the following attributes.
• A laptop or desktop with 64 MB RAM, running Windows® 98 or later,
equipped with an Ethernet network card, 1o Mbps
• A mouse or other pointing device
• Microsoft® Internet Explorer 5.5 or later

The web pages embedded in the MicroStar® have been


tested for access using the Microsoft® Internet Explorer
browser, version 5.5. We do not recommend using
earlier versions or other browsers.

In no event shall HARRIS CORPORATION, its staff


and/or partners be liable to the user for any
special, consequential, indirect or similar
damages, including any lost profits or lost data
arising out of such a security breach. The user is
solely responsible for taking all protection
measures necessary for achieving a secure
connection before, during and after the use of the
Web-CIT software.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Using Web-CIT 4-7

An introduction to Web CIT

The Web Craft Interface Tool (Web CIT) gives the operator a user-friendly,
graphical interface. For presentation purposes, the management station should
have a screen resolution of at least 1024 x 768 pixels.

Starting with software version 9.6.x a new generation of


Web CIT is provided with the type II IDU.

OPERATION
To have access to all features of the Web CIT, you must
disable any pop-up blockers may be running on the
management station. Pop-up blockers are often
provided with security software to stop pop-up
advertisements. Unfortunately they also stop Web CIT
from spawning new windows.

Screen Layout
The Web CIT is composed of 3 frames:
• The Header frame at the top
• The Navigation frame at the middle-left
• The Content frame at the middle-right

Header Frame
• Click on HOME to clear the Content frame and load the default page.
• Click on HELP to open a browser instance displaying this document.
• Click on ABOUT to learn the version number of the Primary Bank Load
and the Alternate Bank Load.
• Click on LOG OFF to close the browser.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-8 OPERATION

Navigation Frame
There are 2 levels of menus in the Navigation frame.
• The first level gives the groups of services the operator can access.
Clicking on the items of this level will collapse or expand the group. The
groups are:
• Fault Management
• Configuration & Status
• Controls
• Administration
• Performances
• The second level allows the user select one screen from among the
screens available in a given group.

The Content Frames


The content frame is divided into two screens: one for the Local Site and one
for the Remote Site. The Local Site is the radio that the management station
is connected to, either physically or through the network; the Remote Site is
the radio that shares the same link (hop) as the Local Site (the Remote Site
is also know as the facing radio).

The remote site screen will be displayed only if the radio


at the remote site has software version 9.6.x or higher
installed. If you have problems accessing the remote
site please refer to "Using Web CIT to Access a Radio
with older software." on page D-13.

The top portion of each content screen contains a header containing 3 LED
symbols and 4 read-only fields. The three LED symbols indicate the presence
(red) or absence (green) of a major alarm, a minor alarm, or an activated
control. The read-only fields give the current RSL, Capacity, Modulation type,
and Protection scheme.
The contents of the area below the header vary depending on what has been
selected in the Navigation frame. In general, they provides the interactive
interface the operator uses to poll, configure, and administer the radio.
Please use the HELP function to obtain information on the various fields and
buttons in the content frames.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Using Web-CIT 4-9

Figure 4-1: Sample Web CIT Home Page


Navigation Frame Top Frame Content Frame

OPERATION

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-10 OPERATION

Using Web CIT to Configure New Radios

The MicroStar’s default IP configuration allows the user to use Web CIT to
immediately configure a new MicroStar radio.
1. Install and power-on the MicroStar.
2. Configure the PC so it accepts its Ethernet IP address from a DHCP server.
3. Reboot the PC so that the new configuration can take effect.
4. Connect the PC to the 10BASE-T port of the local MicroStar.
5. Open a MS-DOS window.
6. Type “ipconfig” and note the IP address that the MicroStar’s DHCP server
has given to the PC.
7. Open a web browser.
8. Subtract 1 from the IP address that the MicroStar’ DHCP server has given
the PC (from step-6) and enter it as follows in the URL text box:
<http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/>. For example, if the IP address from step-6 was
137.237.233.157, you would enter http://137.237.233.156.
9. Configure the local MicroStar.
10. Configure the NE address: all MicroStar radios must have different NE
addresses.
11. Repeat the procedure (Steps 1 through 12) at the other end of the link.
Once the link between the two radios has been established, the user can access
both the local and the remote MicroStar using Web CIT on a PC connected at
either end of the link, provided IP forwarding remains enabled on the local
MicroStar.

The DHCP server and the IP router are enabled by


default in the MicroStar. So, before connecting a
MicroStar to a LAN other than a simple point-to-point
connection with a PC, the user must configure the
MicroStar properly to avoid routing problems or
unwanted IP address leasing on the LAN.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Using Web-CIT 4-11

MicroStar® Network Setup — Type-II IDU

Material Required
Material Supplied by Connect to port
Optional hand-held terminal (HHT)
Harris MCD
with cable and RS-232 connectors, or TERMINAL
VT-100 Terminal Others
PC or laptop with a network port and
cross-over cable with RJ-45
connectors, running Microsoft® Others 10BASE-T/NMS
Internet Explorer, version 5.5 and
later

OPERATION
TERMINAL port, DB-9 RS-232. 10BASE-T/NMS, RJ-45.
Connect the HHT/VT-100 here. Connect PC’s network port here.

Requirements
1. For each radio, use the HHT or VT-100 terminal to assign a unique
Network Element Address (1-999).
2. Using the HHT or VT-100 terminal, enter all SNMP parameters per tables
given in Figures 4-2 and 4-3 for each Network Element.
3. Carry out the setup procedure in the order shown.

On IP Addresses — Definitions
The following table identifies the types of IP addresses for the elements that
are part of the MicroStar® radios’ networks described herein.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-12 OPERATION

Type of IP Address Description Assignment Rules


Internal Network IP address
assigned to each element (NE) in
a network of MicroStar® radios.
Intnet Services carried over Netcomm:
(or Netcomm) • Data channel, SVC, NMS.
Applications run under Netcomm:
1. For any given hop, the Intnet IP
• Web-CIT, StarView™, FTP and
addresses of both radios must
Software Upgrade Utility.
belong to the same Intnet
subnet.
IP address defined under IEEE’s 2. An Ethernet IP address is
Standard 802.3 for Ethernet. optional for a MicroStar® radio
For controlling and monitoring acting as host, and not
MicroStar® radios (NEs), an connected to another network.
Ethernet connection is required 3. For any given hop, the Ethernet
Ethernet between a LAN-connected IP addresses of both radios
(or 10BT/NMS) laptop/PC and one radio acting as must not belong to the same
a router for the MicroStar® Ethernet subnet.
network. 4. For any given hop, the Intnet IP
Applications run under Ethernet: addresses and Ethernet IP
• Web-CIT, StarView™, FTP and addresses of both radios must
Software Upgrade Utility. not belong to the same
subnet.
IP address of a monitoring and
controlling network device.
SNMP This device (PC testing station) can May belong to any other network
collect data on statistics,
performance and security.

Valid Addresses, as applied to Network layouts 1 and 2


Local Radio A Remote Radio B
Rule Valid Range of addresses (as Router B) (as host)
INTNET, range for one subnet, 172.31.130.1 to 172.31.130.1 to
1
(mask 255.255.255.0) 172.31.130.254 172.31.130.254
172.31.128.129 to
Ethernet range (if 2 subnets), 172.31.128.1 to
2 172.31.128.254
(mask 255.255.255.128) 172.31.128.126
(not mandatory)

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Using Web-CIT 4-13

Figure 4-2: Typical Network Layout 1


Refer to "Configuring Router A" on page 4-15
Radio A Radio B
(as Router B)
ETHERNET:
172.31.128.1/25

ETHERNET:
172.31.128.103/25
LAN

Router A
INTNET: 172.31.130.101/24 INTNET: 172.31.130.102/24
ETHERNET:172.31.128.103/25

OPERATION
Testing
Station
SNMP IP: 198.105.23.100/24
ALT SNMP IP: 127.0.0.1

Step Path Set Parameter For Radio A For Radio B


CONFIGURATION ⇒
1 NE ADDRESS 2 3
IDU ⇒
CONFIGURATION ⇒
INTNET
2 IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒ 172.31.130.101/24 172.31.130.102/24
IP ADR/MSK
INTERFACES ⇒

CONFIGURATION ⇒ IP ADDRESS/
172.31.128.103/25 172.31.128.130/25
IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒ MASK
3
INTERFACES ⇒ DHCP PEER
ETHERNET 0.0.0.0. 0.0.0.0.
IP ADDR
CONFIGURATION ⇒
DEFAULT
4 IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒ 172.31.128.1 172.31.130.101a
ROUTER
STATIC ROUTES ⇒
CONFIGURATION ⇒ NMS IP ADRS 198.105.23.100 198.105.23.100
5 IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒
SNMP ⇒ ALT NMS IP ADRS 127.0.0.1b 127.0.0.1b

CONFIGURATION ⇒
6 IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒ FTP USERNAME User’s option User’s option
FTP ⇒
CONFIGURATION ⇒
7 FORWARDING ROUTER HOST
IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒
a. Default router address for remote Radio B = INTNET IP address of local Radio A.
Default router address for local Radio A = ETHERNET IP address of router A
b. Default value

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-14 OPERATION

Figure 4-3: Typical Network Layout 2


Radio A Radio B
(as Router B)

Testing
ETHERNET:
Station
172.31.128.103/25

Ethernet INTNET: 172.31.130.101/24 INTNET: 172.31.130.102/24


ETHERNET: Hub ETHERNET:172.31.128.103/25
172.31.128.253/25

Step Path Set Parameter For Radio A For Radio B


CONFIGURATION ⇒
1 NE ADDRESS 2 3
IDU ⇒
CONFIGURATION ⇒
INTNET
2 IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒ 172.31.130.101/24 172.31.130.102/24
IP ADR/MSK
INTERFACES ⇒

CONFIGURATION ⇒ IP
172.31.128.103/25 172.31.128.130/25
IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒ ADDRESS/MASK
3
INTERFACES ⇒ DHCP PEER
ETHERNET 0.0.0.0. 0.0.0.0.
IP ADDR
CONFIGURATION ⇒
DEFAULT
4 IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒ 172.31.128.253 172.31.130.101a
ROUTER
STATIC ROUTES ⇒
CONFIGURATION ⇒ NMS IP ADRS 172.31.128.253 172.31.128.253
5 IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒
SNMP ⇒ ALT NMS IP ADRS 127.0.0.1b 127.0.0.1

CONFIGURATION ⇒
6 IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒ FTP USERNAME User’s option User’s option
FTP ⇒
CONFIGURATION ⇒
7 FORWARDING ROUTER HOST
IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒
a. Default router address for remote Radio B = INTNET IP address of local Radio A.
Default router address for local Radio A = ETHERNET IP address of testing station
b. Default value

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Using Web-CIT 4-15

Configuring Router A
In the Network Layout #1, Router A requires a static route in order to declare
the INTNET subnet to the LAN. The static route is composed of
• the INTNET Network IP Address;
• the INTNET IP Subnet Mask,
• the IP Address for the entry port (Radio A’s ETHERNET port); and
• the routing metric (optional).
For instance, if the Router is a Cisco router, you would need to enter the
following command in the Configuration Terminal:
Router A (conf t)# IP route 172.31.130.0 255.255.255.0 172.31.128.103

Intnet Intnet IP Ethernet IP

OPERATION
Network IP Subnet Mask Address of
Address of Radio A
Radio A

Recovering from a Network Connection Loss


This section identifies the probable conditions that can cause the loss of
network connections, and presents a solution for recovering such connections.

Probable conditions causing connection loss:


1. Setting the remote Ethernet IP address to the same subnet of the local
Ethernet IP address (shown below).
2. Setting the remote Intnet IP address to a subnet different from that of
the local Intnet IP address.
3. Setting the remote Ethernet IP address to the same subnet of the local
Intnet IP address
4. Creating a loop by connecting the RPTR OUT or ETHERNET port of the
last SPU to the RPTR IN or ETHERNET port of the first SPU, connected
in a daisy chain.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-16 OPERATION

An example:
Local Site Remote Site Status / Comments
Ethernet Ethernet Changed remote IP, but in SAME
172.31.128.1 172.31.128.101 subnet
Intnet Intnet
In SAME subnet
172.31.130.1 172.31.130.28
Do a software Do a software May ping local Ethernet
RESETa RESET 172.31.128.1 and both Intnet IPs
May ping local Ethernet
Switch OFF and ON
172.31.128.1 and both Intnet IPs
Switch OFF and ON LOST CONNECTION
a. Menu path: Shutdown / Shutdown Reason / Reset. Timer can be set to any
desired value

Recovering lost connections:


Local Remote Status / Comments
Ethernet Ethernet Changed remote IP, NOT in
172.31.128.1 172.31.128.140 SAME subnet
Intnet 172.31.130.1 Intnet 172.31.130.28 In SAME subnet
Network still not recovered
Do a software RESET
(local site not yet RESET)
Recovered communications for
Do a software RESET radios with Intnet IPs, and radio
router (local) with LAN
Remove ANY existing loops (RPTR IN/OUT or ETHERNET

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Using Web-CIT 4-17

Configuring the MicroSoft Internet Explorer

The following procedure defines the required web browser and Java
parameters:

Procedure
1. Launch Microsoft Internet Explorer (version 5 or later). Select Internet
Properties from the Tools menu.

Alternately, click on Internet Properties in the Control

OPERATION
Panel, without the need to launch the browser.

2. Open the Security tab, and click on the Trusted Sites icon.

3. Uncheck “Require server verification (https) for all sites in this zone”.
Under “Add this Web site to the zone”, enter “http://” followed by Radio
A’s Ethernet IP Address. Click the Add button.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-18 OPERATION

4. Enter “http://” followed by Radio A’s INTNET IP Address. Repeat these 2


steps for all Radio IP Addresses included in your network. Then click OK.

5. Back in the Trusted Sites zone, click the Custom Level button, and
Reset the custom settings to Low.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Using Web-CIT 4-19

6. Enable ALL Security Settings in the complete window, using the scroll side
bar to access all categories listed before the Java Permissions.
7. Set Java Permissions to Custom and click Java Custom Settings.

OPERATION
8. Under Edit Permissions tab, Enable “Unsigned Content”.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-20 OPERATION

9. Enable the “Signed Content”.

10. Click OK in the Trusted Sites window. Click OK in the


Security Settings window to close it.
11. Click OK in the Internet Properties window to close it.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Using Web-CIT 4-21

12. In the Address window of Microsoft Internet Explorer, enter the URL of
the desired radio (e.g.: http://192.168.19.227). The MicroStar’s Web page
should appear along with the corresponding radio status.

OPERATION

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-22 OPERATION

13. You can select any options in the web page in order to control the given
radio (e.g.: Software Inventory).

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Using the Embedded Control Software 4-23

Using the Embedded Control Software

The embedded control program interacts with the hand held terminal or any
other VT-100 compatible terminal connected to the TERMINAL port on the
SPU. It is composed of a number of menus that are linked together in a tree.
The operator uses key strokes to move from menu to menu and to change
parameters.

Please note that functions equivalent to those described


in this section exist for the FarScan™ and SNMP control
software.

OPERATION
Connecting and using a hand-held terminal unit
or a VT-100 terminal

Hand-Held Terminal Unit


Connect the hand-held terminal to the TERMINAL port on the SPU as shown
in figure 3-32.
As shown in figure 4-4, the hand-held terminal has an 11-key keypad, four
function keys, and a 4-line by 20-column alphanumeric readout (display).
The numeric keys (keys 0 through 9) are used for keying in numeric values.
They are also used for the following functions:
• The 2, 4, 6, and 8 numeric keys are also used as arrow keys and are used
to scroll up (8 key), down (2 key), page-up (4 key), and page-down (6
key) through the menus. Page-up and page-down move the display four
lines up and down respectively.
• The 5 numeric key is used as a HOME key, which closes the existing
menu and returns to the MAIN menu.
The ENTER key is used to initiate the execution of a selected menu function or
register a numeric value.
The function keys (F1, F2, F3, and F4) are used to execute menu functions that
appear as “soft keys” on the last line in applicable menus. Function key F1
corresponds to the first “soft key” selection, F2 to the second, F3 to the third,
and F4 to the fourth. Refer to figure 4-4 for the location of the “soft keys” in the
display.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-24 OPERATION

Figure 4-4: The Hand-held Terminal Unit

F1 F2 F3 F4
7 8 9 0
? ACO
4 5 6
HOME

1 2 3 ENTER

VT-100 Terminal
Connect the VT-100 terminal to the TERMINAL port on the SPU as shown in
figure 3-32.
The craft interface tool (TERMINAL) port can be used with a standard VT-100
terminal. A VT-100 terminal is a widely used type of computer terminal
manufactured by DEC (DIGITAL EQUIPMENT Corporation). Many terminals
from other manufacturers can emulate the VT-100, and software is available
that allows an ordinary PC to emulate a VT-100.
The VT-100 communications port must be configured as follows:
Mode: ANSI
Local echo: OFF
Control: INTERPRET
Host port: RS232C (modem port)
Port speed: 9600 baud
Data bits: 8
Stop bit: 1
Parity: OFF
The layout of the VT-100 terminal is shown in figure 4-5. The keyboard
includes numeric keys 0 through 9 which are used exclusively for keying in
numeric values.
The RETURN key is used to initiate the execution of a selected menu function
or to register a numeric value.
The period key (.) is used as the HOME key.
The dedicated arrow keys are used to move through the menus as follows:

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Using the Embedded Control Software 4-25

↑ scroll up
↓ Scroll down
← Page up
→ Page down
The PF1, PF2, PF3, and PF4 keys serve as the four function keys that represent
the “soft keys” in the display. The soft key EXIT will return the display back to
the previous menu

Figure 4-5: A VT-100 Terminal

OPERATION
PF1 PF2 PF3 PF4

7 8 9 -
RETURN
4 5 6 ,

1 2 3
SHIFT
0 .

Home

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-26 OPERATION

Configuring and operating the radio with a hand


held terminal or other VT-100 compatible
terminal

Moving from Menu to Menu


Once the terminal is connected the operator simply uses certain keys to move
from menu to menu.
The starting point is the main menu shown in figure 4-6. Use the arrow-key to
scroll through the menu until the desired sub-menu is aligned with the cursor.
Then press the return or enter key to display the selected menu. Repeat this
procedure on the item that you wish to view or change. To return to the
previous menu press PF4 (EXIT). To return to the MAIN menu press HOME
(.).
Figure 4-6: The Main Menu

NE ADDRESS
ALARM
2 STATUS
CONTROL

The Menu Item Tree and the Menu Item Glossary


Figure 4-7 shows the first level of menus in the menu tree. The whole menu tree
is given in appendix B, the menu item tree. Appendix C, the menu item
glossary, contains explanations of all the menu items arranged in alphabetical
order.

1 Menu item.
2 Cursor.
3 Soft key spaces (key functions appear when applicable to the present
menu). These soft key spaces are selected by function keys PF1, PF2, PF3,
and PF4 on the keyboard.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Using the Embedded Control Software 4-27

Figure 4-7: Simplified Menu Tree

NE ADDRESS MENU

ALARM MENU

STATUS MENU

CONTROL MENU

OPERATION
MAIN MENU

PERFORMANCE MENU

CONFIGURATION MENU

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

SHUTDOWN

Path Notation
This manual uses a short-form notation convention to designate menu items.
It is similar to the path description used by a number of computer operating
systems. To designate a particular item, we give the item name plus the names
of all the menus between the MAIN menu and the item. The menu item levels
are separated by slash marks in the text. For example, ALARM / TRIBUTARY
ALARM / TRIBUTARY n ALARM / CODE ERROR designates the CODE
ERROR menu item in the ALARM branch.

Passwords
The MicroStar® microwave radio has a password feature that limits access to
the control and configuration menus.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-28 OPERATION

There are three passwords:


1. The control password permits access to the control menu.
2. The configuration password permits access to both the control menu
and the configuration menu and allows the user to change both the control
password and the configuration password.
3. The master password allows access to the control and configuration
menus and allows the user to change any of the three passwords.

When you receive your radio, all passwords are


disabled, and the master password has its default value
of 1000.

To enable the passwords, go to the CONFIGURATION / IDU / CONFIG


PASSWORD menu item and enter a four digit number for the configuration
password. Then go to the CONFIGURATION / IDU / CONTROL
PASSWORD item, which will now be available, and enter a four digit number
for the control password.
To change the master password, use the master password (initially set to 1000)
to access the configuration menu. Then go to the CONFIGURATION / IDU /
MASTER PASSWORD menu item and enter a four digit password.
If you forget or lose the master password you can use the IDENT feature to
display it as follows:
1. Try to access the configuration menu.
2. When a password is requested, press <control-B> (VT-100) or F1 and F3
(HHT) to display the IDENT number: a random number that changes each
time you use the master password to access the configuration menu.
3. Call the Harris Technical Assistance Center, identify yourself, and give the
IDENT number to the customer service representative. He or she will give
you a number which you can then enter to display the current value of the
master password.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Using the Embedded Control Software 4-29

Selecting Menu Options


Many of the menus provide a number of optional operations. For example the
CONTROL / ODU / CW TONE item provides two options: CLR (normal) and
SET.
In the CONTROL branch these options are shown on the display. Also shown
on the display is the standard EXIT option as a soft key position on the bottom
line of the screen. To select a soft key option, press the PF key that corresponds
to the option (see figure 4-7).
In the CONFIGURATION branch, options appear in the NEW VAL field of a
selection screen (see figure 4-8) that appears when the corresponding
parameter is selected from the menu. The operator uses the PREV and NEXT
keys to bring the required value into the NEW VAL field, then presses EXEC to
select it as the new configuration value.

OPERATION
Figure 4-8: Configuration Option Selection Screen

RTU BAUD
ACTUAL VAL: 9600
NEW VAL: 2400

PREV NEXT EXEC EXIT

The NE Address
The network element (NE) address, is unique to each radio in the network.
The embedded control software and FarScan™ network control software use
this address to select remote radios for control and monitoring operations. The
embedded control software uses the NE ADDRESS item in the main menu to
enter the address of the remote radio to be operated. The NE ADDESS item in
the configuration menu is used to set the NE ADDRESS of the local radio.The
selection screen for configuring the NE address is similar to the one shown in
figure 4-8, with the difference that it allows the operator to enter an NE address
value in the NEW VAL field before pressing EXEC.
The NE address is also used as the service channel address (telephone number)
of units that have an orderwire installed.

The Configuration / IDU / Net-Com / Remote


configuration point must be enabled before the HHT can
connect to a remote radio.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-30 OPERATION

Loopback

Executing any loopback function will interrupt receive


traffic.

Tributary loopback causes the traffic to be ‘looped back’ at the remote site for
the local site. Traffic is connected from the outputs of the tributary line drivers
to the tributary inputs of the remote radio as shown in figure 4-9. This type of
loopback is used to loopback traffic from one end of a hop to the other.
To cause tributary n to be looped back, select the SET option for the
CONTROL / IDU / TRIB LOOPBACK / TRIB LPBK n menu item.
To activate the Mux-to-Demux loopback, select the SET option for the
CONTROL / IDU / MUX - DEMUX LPBK.
Figure 4-9: Tributary and Mux-to-Demux Loopback

MicroStar® MicroStar®
Tributary 1 Tributary 1
Tributary
User’s line drivers
Mux
equipment Tributary N
Tributary
line receivers
Tributary 1 Tributary N

Demux
Tributary N

Remote site
Local site radio radio in loopback mode

N = The total number of tributaries

Loopback can be performed from a remote site using a hand-held terminal, a


VT-100 terminal, or FarScan™, or SNMP. With either of these tools, the remote
radio site can be logged into by using the NE ADDRESS MENU. Once logged
into the remote site, set the tributary loopback.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Using the Embedded Control Software 4-31

Configuring the MicroStar® Radio


Using the hand-held terminal unit or a VT-100, the operator can reconfigure
most of the operating parameters of the MicroStar® . Among others, these
include:
• Selecting the tributary code
• Setting the AIS threshold
• Setting the BER threshold
For a full list of parameters that can be re-configured refer to the
CONFIGURATION branch of the menu tree in appendix B.
To modify the configuration of the microwave radio, simply go to the
configuration menu for the unit affected and select the parameter to be
changed. A menu will appear with a ACTUAL VAL and a NEW VAL field. The
ACTUAL VAL shows the current value of the parameter. The NEW VAL field

OPERATION
shows the values that you can select to replace the value in the ACTUAL VAL
field. The operator uses the PREV and NEXT keys to scroll the required value
into the NEW VAL field, then presses EXEC to select it as the new configuration
value.

Automatic Inter-Unit Software Download


When a new ODU is installed, the SPU will check if the ODU requires a software
update. If so, the SPU will raise a S/W INCOMPATIBLE alarm. The SPU will
then automatically start a software download to the ODU. The radio
configuration is not altered.
In most cases the download function will successfully update the software in
the system as required; however, if the hardware or software is defective, or if
the units are incompatible, the operation will not succeed, and one or more of
the following alarms will appear:
• SOFTWARE CORRUPTED: Indicates that the firmware in the ODU is
defective. Replace the ODU to clear the alarm.
• DOWNLOAD FAILED: Indicates that for unknown reasons, the
download was not successful. A SOFTWARE CORRUPTED alarm will
also be shown. Replace the ODU to clear the alarm.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-32 OPERATION

Setting Frequencies
The center frequencies of the transmit and receive signals at the RF ports can
be set directly. The value entered must be a multiple of 125 kHz (for the
MicroStar® 7/8 GHz) or 250 GHz (for the MicroStar® 13/15/18 GHz), and
must be set so that all of the signal is within the frequency limits of the ODU.
The width of the signal (signal bandwidth) depends on the capacity of the radio
(see table 2-8, “Channel Bandwidth Allocation”, on page 2-22). The center
frequency of the signal must be at least 66% of the signal bandwidth away from
the upper or lower frequency limits of the ODU.
The transceiver is programmed with the CONFIGURATION / ODU /
TX FREQ SET (kHz) menu item.

If you change the radio frequencies at the remote end,


traffic will be lost until you set corresponding radio
frequencies at the local site.

Attenuating the Transmit Signal


You can attenuate the power of the transmitter output by from 0 to 20 dBs,
(7/8 GHz) or 0 to 30 dBs (13/15/18 GHz) in 1-dB steps. This is a useful feature
for short hops in congested areas where attenuating the output power will
reduce interference with other nearby radios. See TX ATTEN in Appendix C.

Remote Time-Out
Remotely executing the PA MUTE and CW TONE commands at a another site
will isolate that site from the site giving the commands, making it impossible to
reverse the commands. For this reason, there is an automatic time-out feature
that reverses these commands after 10 minutes.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Upgrading the Software and Firmware 4-33

Upgrading the Software and Firmware

This section describes a procedure for upgrading the software and firmware of
a MicroStar® radio equipped with a Type-II IDU with embedded software
v9.1 or higher only.

Use STRICTLY the Harris MCD Upgrade Utility to


manage all software/firmware upgrade files.
Using another FTP utility may produce
unexpected results. Harris MCD disclaims all
special, consequential, indirect or similar

OPERATION
damages, including any lost profits or lost data
arising from using this package differently from
the instructions provided herein by HARRIS MCD.

In a network that includes all 3 types of IDUs, we


strongly recommend using a Type-II IDU as the
gateway for the network. Much faster data transfers are
achieved by connecting to the Type-II SPU’s 10BASE-T
port instead of the RTU port of Type-I and Type-III
IDU’s. If the operator’s point of entry to the network is
not a Type-II SPU, contact a TAC representative for a
better solution.

For the Microstar M13/15/18 GHz radio only, we


strongly recommend that you perform software
upgrades during maintenance periods or periods
of low traffic; because there is a low probability
that the upgrade may cause a brief loss of traffic.
However, in the rare instances where this
happens, the radio traffic will automatically be
restored within seconds.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-34 OPERATION

Minimum Hardware Requirements


• A user interface (hand-held terminal connecting to radio’s TERMINAL
port, or PC running the Web-CIT (preferred)
• A PC or laptop with 64 MB RAM, running Windows® 98 or later,
equipped with an Ethernet network card, 1o Mbps
• 80 MB of available disk space for storing the required software
• A mouse or other pointing device
• A network cross-over cable with RJ-45 connectors (for connecting the
PC’s network port to the radio’s 10BASE-T/NMS port). The Harris
part number for this type of cable is 087-020193-706.

Table 4-2: Required Software Files


Application or File Available from
Java2 Runtime Environment, SE v1.4.0_03
Sun MicroSystems
(j2re-1_4_0_03-windows-i586.exe)
Harris MCD’s Software Upgrade Utility v.1.2.xx.exe
HARRIS MCD
Software/Firmware Upgrade file 501-902101-xxx.zip

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Upgrading the Software and Firmware 4-35

Overview
Upgrading equipment consists of downloading new software or new firmware
to the equipment’s alternate memory space; then, doing an upgrade reboot of
the equipment. In the case of software, the upgrade reboot switches the active
and alternate memory spaces during the operation. In the case of firmware, the
upgrade reboot copies the firmware from the alternate memory to the
destination devices during the operation.
The alternate memory space is not big enough to hold both the software and the
firmware at the same time. As a result, if both the software and the firmware
are being upgraded, the operation must be done in two steps. First the new
software must be downloaded, followed by an upgrade reboot; then, the
firmware must be downloaded and the upgrade reboot must be performed
again. Finally the operator should check that the reboot was successful.
Following is a list of the operations that have to be done in sequence. Each item

OPERATION
has a cross reference to the corresponding procedure.
1. Verify that the Authorized NMS feature has been disabled or that the PC
being used is an authorized SNMP client. See "SNMP Access" on page 4-5.
2. Install the upgrade utility: see "Installing the MCD Software Upgrade
Utility" on page 4-37
3. Use the upgrade utility to download the new software to the equipment
and to reboot the equipment: see "Upgrading the Software on All Sites" on
page 4-38
4. Since a firmware upgrade operation takes several minutes and causes a hit
on the traffic you should avoid it whenever possible. To find out if a
firmware upgrade is required, using the upgrade utility, enter the IP
address of the target radio, and press the confirm button. Compare the
version numbers of the Modem.dat and FPGA.dat files in the radio with
the version numbers of the same files in the new package. If the file
versions match, you do not need to perform a firmware upgrade and
should skip steps 4 and 5 below.
5. Use the upgrade utility to download the new firmware to the equipment:
see "Download the Firmware Files to All Sites" on page 4-41
6. Reboot all the equipment at the same time: see "Why do we synchronize
the Reboot after Firmware Download" on page 4-42
• To reboot using the upgrade utility see"Using the Upgrade Utility to
Initiate a Synchronized Reboot" on page 4-42
• To reboot using the HHT/VT-100 see "Using the HHT/VT-100 to
Initiate a Synchronized Reboot" on page 4-43
• To reboot using the Web CIT see "Using the Web CIT to Initiate a
Synchronized Network-wide Reboot" on page 4-44

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-36 OPERATION

7. Validate that the update was successful.


• To validate using the HHT/VT-100 see "Validating the Upgrade Using
the HHT/VT-100" on page 4-47
• To validate using the Web CIT see "Validating the Successful Firmware
Upgrade using the Web CIT" on page 4-48
8. Re-enable the local radio’s RPTR IN and RPTR OUT ports if they are to be
used: see"Re-enabling the RPTR Ports on the Local Radio
(for systems running software v9.0 only)" on page 4-49

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Upgrading the Software and Firmware 4-37

Installing the MCD Software Upgrade Utility


1. Copy the Upgrade Utility v.1.2.xx.exe and the 501-902101-xxx.zip
files to your PC/Laptop. These files are found in CDF-902101-xxx.zip,
which Harris will have supplied to you on a CD ROM or as a download.
2. Upgrade Utility v.1.2.xx.exe is a self-extracting zip file. Run it and
extract the contents to a convenient directory. By default, this folder will be
called \Upgrade Utility v.1.2.xx.
3. From the upgrade utility directory, run the executable Setup.exe. and
follow the displayed instructions to install the utility.

If the following message appears, continue with the steps below to install
the Java2 Runtime Environment, SE v1.4.x (JRE) and complete the
installation of the utility.

OPERATION
4. Access the link to the Sun MicroSystems download page, and select the
Windows® version of the file that you require, (US version
recommended).
5. Run the JRE executable on the PC/Laptop; then, reboot the PC/Laptop.
6. Install the Upgrade Utility by running the Setup.exe file located in the
upgrade utility directory folder.
7. Reboot the computer.

Carry out the following software upgrade sequence,


starting with the furthest (remote) site and ending
with the local site. In these steps, the local site refers
to the radio connected to the PC/Laptop.

The installer’s PC must be on the same IP subnet as the


IDU that it is connected to.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-38 OPERATION

Upgrading the Software on All Sites


1. Launch the upgrade utility.
2. In the File to download field, Browse to file 501-902101-xxx.zip to
enter its full path on the PC.
3. In the Microstar Type II field enter the Intnet IP Address of the radio to
be upgraded. Enter the SNMP Community Name (if applicable), and
Confirm. All information available on the resident software of the chosen
radio will display in the Product field, in the following window (example
only).

D:\501-902101-401.zip

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Upgrading the Software and Firmware 4-39

4. In the FTP Access area, enter the User Name and Password, if
applicable. Accept the default of 100 ms for the Delay between sending
files.

5. If upgrading from a software version that is earlier that 9.2.15, you will
receive the following message. Click OK to proceed and remember to
upgrade twice.

OPERATION
6. In the Upgrade field, select Software (9.2.xx), and click Upgrade.
This displays the following window.

7. Click OK to confirm. The software upgrade process will last about


5-6 minutes, confirmed by the following window.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-40 OPERATION

8. The final window is the Reboot Type window. To reboot the equipment
immediately, select Immediate as the Reboot option and then click
Apply. To reboot after a delay, select Delayed, enter a delay in
seconds, and click Apply.

9. Repeat Steps 3 through 8 above for each site, ending with the local site.

Remember to repeat these steps if you received the


message shown in Step 5 above.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Upgrading the Software and Firmware 4-41

Download the Firmware Files to All Sites

Download the firmware upgrade files starting with the


furthest site in the network and ending with the local
site, one site at a time.

1. In the Harris MCD Upgrade Utility window, enter the Intnet IP Address
of the radio at a remote site in the MicroStar Type II field, the SNMP
Community Name (if applicable), and click Confirm. Version
information about the software and firmware currently on the chosen
radio will be displayed in the Product field.

OPERATION
2. In the FTP Access area, enter the User Name and Password. Accept
the default of 100 ms for the Delay between sending files.
3. Select the Firmware option in the Upgrade field. (Refer to page 4-38).
4. Click the Upgrade button, then click OK in the reboot Confirmation
window. The files upload to the radio will last about 4 minutes, ending with
the display of the Reboot Type window.
5. In the Reboot Type window, select No Reboot as the Reboot option,
or select Delayed. If you select No Reboot, after all the radios have the
new firmware, you will have to use either the HHT/VT-100 or Web CIT to
synchronize the reboot operations as described in "Using the HHT/VT-
100 to Initiate a Synchronized Reboot" on page 4-43 and "Using the Web
CIT to Initiate a Synchronized Network-wide Reboot" on page 4-44
respectively. If you select Delayed, synchronize the reboot as described in
"Using the Upgrade Utility to Initiate a Synchronized Reboot" on page
4-42. We recommend that you select NO Reboot if you are upgrading
several radios, since the HHT and WEB CIT provide the best way of
synchronizing multiple reboots.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 above for each site, ending with the local site.

While the firmware upgrade is being carried out


on a given radio, you will loose traffic with the
remote site on the same hop. Applying the
procedures given here within the recommended
time delays will minimize this outage.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-42 OPERATION

Why do we synchronize the Reboot after Firmware


Download
If different radios in a network have different software, they can still function
together; but if they have different firmware, there is a high probability that
they will loose supervisory contact and/or traffic. Traffic and supervision will
be restored as soon as all the radios are using the same version of firmware. As
a consequence, in order to minimize down time, it is important to reboot all the
radios at the same time, preferably during a low traffic period.

Using the Upgrade Utility to Initiate a Synchronized


Reboot
You can use the delay timer in the upgrade utility’s reboot window to
synchronize the reboots; however, because the delays are entered at the end
each download it may be difficult to calculate the required delay. You will need
to estimate the amount of time that it will take to down load to the other radios
and use a delay that is longer, providing a safety margin. Typically you would
choose an arbitrary reboot time that provides such a delay; then, each time you
download to a different radio you would enter the current number of seconds
to the that reboot time. If your calculations are correct you will have finished
downloading the firmware to all the radios before the reboot time arrives and
all the radios will be rebooted together.
The advantage of this method its that it uses the same tool (the upgrade utility)
that is used to download the software. The disadvantage is that the delay
calculation is more complicated than what is required by the alternative
methods.
1. Select Delayed, enter a delay in seconds, and click Apply. To finish
without a reboot select NoReboot and click Apply. In the latter case you
must use one of the other methods to upgrade reboot the equipment.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Upgrading the Software and Firmware 4-43

Using the HHT/VT-100 to Initiate a Synchronized


Reboot

The following sequence demonstrates a network-wide


firmware reboot for a typical network of 10 radios, and
reduces traffic loss to the minimum, provided that the
sequence is Not interrupted once initiated.

1. Using the HHT or a VT-100, enter the NE Address of the equipment at


the farthest remote site (radio 10 in this example):
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / NE ADDRESS

OPERATION
2. In the following menu items, enter UPGRADE as the shutdown reason
and enter the shutdown delay as per the entry that corresponds to the radio
in the table below.
Menu path: SHUTDOWN / SHUTDOWN REASON ..(UPGRADE)
Menu path: SHUTDOWN DELAY ..........................(195 [for
radio 10])

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each radio, moving from the farthest radio to the
closest radio, reducing the delay by 15 s at each subsequent radio.
Here we assume that it takes 15 seconds to program the delay on one radio.
If you take more or less time, increase or decrease the time decrement
accordingly.
Delay,
Radio # ns
10 195
9 180
8 165
7 150
6 135
5 120
4 105
3 90
2 75
1 60

All 10 radios should reboot 60 seconds after the delay at the local radio has been
programmed.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-44 OPERATION

Using the Web CIT to Initiate a Synchronized


Network-wide Reboot

Before using the Web-CIT 9.2.18 or lower to


control a radio after using the upgrade utility, be
sure to uncheck the “Use Java2 v1.4.0 for
<applet>” option, as shown in the following
window. If you have Web-CIT 9.2.19 or higher
leave it checked.

Access this window from the Internet Explorer main window under
Tools/Internet Options/Advanced.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Upgrading the Software and Firmware 4-45

The following sequence demonstrates a network-wide


firmware reboot for a typical network of 10 radios, and
reduces traffic loss to the minimum, provided that the
sequence is Not interrupted once initiated.

1. Launch the Microsoft® Internet Browser.


2. In the Address field of the browser, enter the Intnet IP address of the
furthest site in the network; here, radio #10.
3. This opens the Web-CIT window for the radio. Click the Shutdown side-
bar item to access the Shutdown Timer window, as shown below.

OPERATION

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-46 OPERATION

4. In the Shutdown reason scroll-down field, select FIRMWARE UPGRADE,


and enter n seconds (per the following table) in the Shutdown delay
field. For radio #10, enter 600 s.
Delay,
Radio #
ns

10 600

9 540

8 480

7 420

6 360

5 300

4 240

3 180

2 120

1 60

5. Click Start timer.


6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 above for each radio, progressing from radio
#9 to radio #1 (the local site) and decreasing the delay times as you
approach the local site, as indicated in the table above.
7. For this network, the firmware reboot should start at almost the same time
on all radios. To verify the successful completion of the firmware upgrade,
refer to the following Validation Procedures.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Upgrading the Software and Firmware 4-47

Validating the Upgrade Using the HHT/VT-100


1. Using the HHT or a VT-100, enter the Equipment’s NE Address of a
remote radio:
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / NE ADDRESS.
2. Enter the following
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / SPU /
and verify that the values of these parameters have been updated:
• PK VER Software package version
• ALT PK Alternate software package version
• S/W VER Radio’s embedded software version
• MODEM Version of the current modem parameter file
• ALT MDM Version of the alternate modem parameter file

OPERATION
• ODU-DF ODU description file version
• ALT ODU-DF Alternate description file version of the ODU
• FPGA Firmware’s file version of the FPGA
• ALT FPGA Alternate firmware’s file version of the FPGA

3. Repeat the preceding 2 steps for the each radio.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-48 OPERATION

Validating the Successful Firmware Upgrade using the


Web CIT
1. While still in the Web-CIT window of the local site (radio #1), open a
new browser window and enter the Intnet IP Address of a remote radio.
2. With both windows open, you should be able to see the countdown in the
Shutdown delay field of the Web-CIT window (page 4-45) of the local
radio and the remote radio.
3. Once one or both timers reaches 0 s, the firmware upgrade reboot launches
and lasts a few seconds. During that time, traffic is lost until the firmware
upgrade reboot of the both radios is completed.
4. You may want to keep the local site window open while entering the
address of each remote site in the other Web-CIT window to confirm the
completion of the upgrade.
5. To verify that the upgrade was successful on the local site and any other
remote site, click on Software Inventory in the Web-CIT window of
each site. The following 2 windows illustrate such an example,
(http://192.168.19.20 for radio #1 and http://192.168.19.130 for
radio #10).

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Upgrading the Software and Firmware 4-49

OPERATION
Re-enabling the RPTR Ports on the Local Radio
(for systems running software v9.0 only)

If you intend to continue using the RPTR IN and


RPTR OUT ports, disable the LAN after you
upgrade the software.

Both the upgrade utility and the Web CIT use the 10BASE-T port on the local
radio the (radio to which the operator’s PC is connected). In order for this to
work, the LAN configuration point must be enabled on that radio. When the
LAN configuration point is enabled, the RPTR IN and RPTR OUT ports are
automatically disabled. Because of this, after upgrading the software, you will
NOT be able to access the RPTR IN and RPTR OUT ports until the LAN is
disabled, and the RPTR IN and RPTR OUT ports automatically become
available again.
• To disable the LAN, use the Hand-held terminal:
CONFIGURATION / IDU / NET_COMM / LAN / DISABLE

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


4-50 OPERATION

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


5
C H A P T E R

MAINTENANCE AND
TROUBLESHOOTING

TROUBLESHOOTING
MAINTENANCE AND
Maintenance

No routine maintenance needs to be performed on the MicroStar® radio. If a


radio does fail, it is repaired by replacing the SPU, PU or the ODU. There are no
user-serviceable parts or field adjustments to be made within the SPU/PU or
ODU.
Refer to Chapter 6 for warranty and repair information.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


5-2 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

General Considerations

Before shutting down a radio for maintenance or other


reasons, it is good practice to force traffic on the
coordinating radio to one side. Otherwise the
coordinating radio may repetitively switch traffic
between sides when it looses contact with the radio that
you are shutting down.

If an alarm is present in the system, and you force


traffic from A to B or vice versa, a loss of traffic may
occur. This applies particularly to the case where the
SPU or PU has lost telemetry with the corresponding
RFU.

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting with the LEDs

Refer to the table 5-1 to identify probable causes of typical problems.

Troubleshooting with the hand-held terminal or


the VT-100 terminal

Refer to Appendix C for the corrective action to be taken when there are alarms
that are indicated by the LED indicator or by software.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Troubleshooting 5-3

Table 5-1: SPU Front Panel Indicator Light Troubleshooting Table

Symptom

LED Probable cause Corrective action

ALarm
Green Indicates normal operation
Red (Flickering) SDRAM failure Replace the SPU or PU
Normal condition when:
• SPU / PU intitializing (software loading) lasting a few seconds,
otherwise, troubleshoot the SPU and/or the PU (see below)
Hardware failure Replace the SPU or PU.
Troubleshoot the ODU —
Hardware failure
see below.
Red (continuous)
There is a short or open in the
Check / replace the coaxial cable
coaxial cable between the SPU and

TROUBLESHOOTING
MAINTENANCE AND
between the SPU and ODU.
ODU (check connectors also).
Major alarm: Synchronization loss,
BER alarm, remote synchronization
loss, loss of tributary (both local or
remote site).
Check the radio ALARM MENU to
Minor alarm: Baseband code error, determine the nature of the
tributary alarm (input loss, input problem. Refer to figure B-3.
AIS, output AIS, tributary input
Yellow
code error), receive end tributary
loopback, and remote site power
mute.
Check if there is power at the BATT
Microwave radio has no power
connector of the SPU.
Replace the fuse. If the fuse blows
again:
LED is not lit • Check wiring between SPU and
the fuse block for a short-circuit.
Blown fuse for the circuit
• Check wiring between SPU and
ODU for a short-circuita.
• Replace the SPU
• Troubleshoot the ODU.
a. Before connecting this cable to the SPU, make sure to check for the presence of a short along the
cable length. A short in the coaxial cable or in the ODU may damage the SPU’s switch (fuse) when
it is switched ON. If this is the case, replace the faulty element (cable or ODU).

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


5-4 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Replacing Units

Replacing a Faulty, but functional SPU

This procedure interrupts traffic.

This is the case of a PU-protected SPU with a functional


muldex, that can still pass traffic. It is assumed that
there is one free rackmount space above the SPU, per
Figure 3-22. If there is none, arrange to position the
new SPU on a temporary support that is close and at the
same height as the faulty SPU’s position.

To further shorten configuration time, it is possible to


upload the Config.dat1 file through FTP to a PC before
starting this procedure. Once saved, this file can be
restored to the new SPU, and you will need to initiate a
software reset to enable the saved configuration.

Procedure
1. Starting with an SPU that bears the same part number and includes the
same software version as the replaceable one, deposit the new SPU on top
of the faulty SPU, (if the above-mentioned Note applies). Ground the unit.
2. Force traffic through channel-B (see"force tx a(b) [SET / CLR]" on page C-
10).
3. Switch OFF the faulty SPU and disconnect it’s grounding cable, figure 5-1.

1. A file containing all user-saved parameters, residing in the radio’s embedded software.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Replacing Units 5-5

Figure 5-1: Disconnecting Power and Ground Cables


Switch power OFF

4. Transfer the power cable and ground wire from the faulty SPU to new SPU
and connect a Hand-held Terminal (HHT) to the new SPU’s TERMINAL
port.

TROUBLESHOOTING
MAINTENANCE AND
5. Switch ON the new SPU.
6. Once the SPU reboot has completed, the HHT will display various screens,
ending with the screen in"The Main Menu" on page 4-26. At this point,
configure the following parameters to the same values of the faulty SPU.

Parameter Path Defaults


NE ADDRESS CONFIGURATION / IDU / NE ADDRESS 999
MODULATION CONFIGURATION / IDU / MODULATION QPSK
CAPACITY CONFIGURATION / IDU / CAPACITY 16x2Mb
TRIBUTARY CONFIGURATION / IDU / TRIBUTARY DISABLE
CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET /
INTERFACES / 10BT/NMS ETHERNET /
IP ADDRESS IP ADDRESS/MASK; or ——
CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET /
INTERFACES / NET_COMM IP ADR/MSKA
a. As required

7. If the PROTECTION item is present in CONFIGURATION / IDU menus, set it


to UNPR (unprotected). Absence of the CONFIGURATION item indicates that
the radio is already unprotected.
8. Check for alarms. The following alarms, and only the following alarms,
should be present:
• CABLE ALARM / CABLE A ALARM
• Rx TRAFFIC / SYNC LOSS
• TRIBUTARY ALARM
9. Switch OFF the new SPU.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


5-6 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

10. Transfer the RFU (coaxial) cable from the faulty SPU to the new SPU.
11. Switch ON the new SPU.

Traffic is interrupted at this point only. You are


encouraged to complete this transfer carefully in the
shortest time possible (a few seconds). Once done,
traffic is instantly back to normal.

12. After a few moments, a Tributary alarm will appear on the HHT.
Immediately transfer the tributary cable from the faulty SPU to new
SPU and turn off the PU.
13. Transfer remaining cables, if any, from the faulty SPU to the new SPU.
14. Disconnect the protection cable from the faulty SPU, leaving the other end
of that cable attached to the PU.
15. Unfasten all screws attaching the faulty SPU, and remove it from the rack
while holding the new SPU, (if the new SPU was placed over it in Step 1.
16. Install the new SPU in the previous location of the faulty SPU. Using the
screws removed in Step 15, attach the new SPU to the rack.
17. Connect the protection cable to new SPU, after properly aligning the pins
on the SCSI connector/port and observing the note on page 3-27.
Tighten the thumbscrews.
18. Switch ON the PU and wait 10 seconds.
19. Configure protection to the desired mode: MHSB, SD, etc.

This will cause a hit: SYNC LOSS under ALARM /


RX TRAFFIC ALARM. This is normal and does not
indicate any other hardware failure. Alarms will
disappear once the PU is online. Network and orderwire
services are recovered once all required cables are
reconnected to the SPU/PU. For Network configurations
refer to "MicroStar® Network Setup — Type-II IDU" on
page 4-11.

20. Check that all forced conditions are cleared. See "force tx a(b)
[SET / CLR]" on page C-10.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Replacing Units 5-7

Replacing a Non-Functioning1 SPU

This is the case of a non-repairable SPU. Traffic is


interrupted during this procedure. You may want to
move traffic to an alternate equipment before starting.
You may also want to save file Config.dat, refer to the
Note on page 5-4.

When replacing the SPU, the radio configuration must be known. Once the new
SPU has been installed, the radio must be fully configured manually by the
operator to the configuration of the previous SPU.

Procedure

TROUBLESHOOTING
MAINTENANCE AND
1. Switch OFF power to the SPU at the source, (breaker or fuse).
2. Disconnect the power and ground wires from the SPU, figure 5-1.
3. Disconnect the coaxial cable from the SPU.
4. Disconnect all other wires and cables from the SPU.
5. Replace the SPU with a new one that bears the same part number and
includes the same software version as the replaceable one, refer to section
"Installing the SPU and PU" on page 3-24.
6. Install and reconnect all wires and cables to the SPU.

Before connecting the coaxial cable to the SPU,


make sure to check for the presence of a short
along the cable length. A short in this cable or in
the RFU may damage the SPU’s breaker when it is
switched ON. If this is the case, replace the faulty
element (cable or RFU).

7. Switch ON power to the SPU at the source.


8. Use the embedded control software to configure the SPU.

1. No traffic is passing.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


5-8 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Replacing the PU

Procedure
1. Force traffic through channel-A (see"force tx a(b) [SET / CLR]" on page C-
10).
2. Switch OFF the PU.

This will cause a hit: SYNC LOSS under ALARM /


RX TRAFFIC ALARM. You will also receive a PU ABSENT
alarm under ALARM / IDU ALARM. This is normal and
does not indicate any other hardware failure. Alarms
will disappear once a new PU is in place and functional.

3. Disconnect the power cable and the coaxial cable from the PU, Figure 5-1.
4. Disconnect the protection cable from the PU, leaving the other end of that
cable attached to the SPU.
5. Remove the PU from the rack after unfastening all its screws.
6. Install a new PU with the same part number in the same place, by referring
to section "Installing the SPU and PU" on page 3-24.
7. Connect the protection cable to new PU, observing the note on page 3-27.
Tighten the thumbscrews.
8. Switch ON the PU.

This will also cause a hit, as described in Step 2 above.


Network and Orderwire services are recovered once all
required cables are reconnected to the SPU, and the
new PU switched back ON. For network configurations,
refer to "MicroStar® Network Setup — Type-II IDU" on
page 4-11.

9. Re-enable protection switching by clearing the forced condition (see "force


tx a(b) [SET / CLR]" on page C-10).

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Replacing an ODU Module 5-9

Replacing an ODU Module

Replacing a Transceiver

1. In protected systems force traffic to the channel that is not having the RFU
changed.
2. If you are replacing the channel-A XCVR, switch off power at the SPU. If
you are replacing the channel-B XCVR switch off power at the PU.
Figure 5-2: Switching off Power at the SPU or PU

Before changing the Cannel-A RFU Switch power OFF here

TROUBLESHOOTING
MAINTENANCE AND
Before changing the Cannel-B RFU Switch power OFF here

10. Disconnect the coaxial cable at the ODU. Set the SPU switch to the O (off)
position.
11. Open the door of the ODU.

Tag (label) wires and cables before disconnecting them.

12. Disconnect the cables going to and from the transceiver.


13. Loosen the spring-wedge1 attachments and pull it out from between the
two transceivers.

1. Does not apply to the MicroStar® M 13/15/18 GHz.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


5-10 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

14. Loosen the knob of the retaining screw on the transceiver to be removed.
15. Remove the transceiver.
Figure 5-3: Removing a Transceiver

Spring-Wedge
(for the
MicroStar® 7/8 GHz
only)

Transceiver
Retaining Screws

Vent Holes

16. Insert the new transceiver (having the same Part Number), and partially
tighten the retaining screw.
17. Wedge the spring-wedge between the two transceivers, keeping it clear of
the vent holes in the sides of the transceivers.
18. Fully tighten the retaining screw.
19. Reconnect the cables going to and from the transceiver.
(Refer to figures 5-5 through 5-17 for different wiring options).

These figures are shown for reference ONLY and cable


routing may differ slightly from actual routing. Always
refer to the wiring label fixed on the inside of the ODU
door.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Replacing an ODU Module 5-11

Part numbers shown in these figures refer to semi-flex


cables with SMA-to-SMA connectors. These cable part
numbers are required when ordering spares.
Refer to table 6-1.

20. Close the door of the ODU, latch the ODU door, tighten the two screws on
the door to 1.6 N•m (14.4 lb.•inch) to prevent water infiltration.
21. Set the SPU switch to the I (on) position.
22. The SPU may have to do a software download to the ODU.
23. Verify that there are no alarms on the system.
24. Verify that the power output level complies with the specifications, using
the HHT in the path STATUS / SYSTEM STATUS / POUT.

TROUBLESHOOTING
MAINTENANCE AND

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


5-12 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Replacing an HPA (MicroStar® 7/8 GHz Only)

To maintain traffic on a protected system, before you


start the procedure, use the Web-CIT or the embedded
software to force traffic to the side not affected by the
operation.

In the following procedure, when connecting and


disconnecting cables, bend them as little as
possible. Excessive bending will damage the
cables and affect the radio’s performance.

Removing the HPA


1. Open the front of the ODU.
2. Disconnect all cables from the HPA and carefully move them from the path
of the HPA.
3. Pull the locking levers on the front of the HPA to the horizontal position;
then slide the HPA out of the ODU. Refer to figure 5-4.

Installing the HPA


1. Holding both locking levers in the horizontal position, slide the HPA into
the ODU as far as it will go.
2. Move the card-lock levers to the vertical position for locking the HPA in
place.

For reconnecting cables, refer to the diagram on the


inside of the ODU door or to figures 5-10 through 5-14,
for the MicroStar® 7/8 GHz radio.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Replacing an ODU Module 5-13

3. Using a torque wrench set to 0.1 kg•m (9 inch-pounds), connect the coaxial
cable coming from the TX OUT connector on the transceiver unit to the RF
IN connector on the HPA.
4. Connect the ribbon cable from the HPA connector on the transceiver unit
to the DB-15 connector on the HPA.
5. Close the door of the ODU, latch the ODU door, tighten the two screws on
the door to 1.6 N•m (14.4 inch•lb) to prevent water infiltration.
6. Verify that there are no alarms on the system.
7. Verify that the power output level complies with the specifications, using
the HHT in the path STATUS / SYSTEM STATUS / POUT path.

TROUBLESHOOTING
MAINTENANCE AND

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


5-14 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Figure 5-4: Replacing an HPA

Ventilated enclosure for


MicroStar® 7/8 GHz with HPA
option, installed indoors ONLY.
(perforations omitted for clarity)

Levers to be in
horizontal position
when inserting the HPA
(Right side)

RF-IN
RF-OUT

RF-IN

RF-OUT

Levers to be in
horizontal position
when inserting the HPA
(Left side)

Transceivers’ Label
Retaining Screws

Spring-Wedge
(for the MicroStar® 7/8 GHz Only)

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Replacing an ODU Module 5-15

Figure 5-5: Wiring for a MicroStar® 7/8 GHz


Non-Protected Radio
OPTION 201-901420-901 (Outdoor)
OPTION 201-901420-921 (Indoor)

TROUBLESHOOTING
MAINTENANCE AND
20

19

2 087-099412-001

19 087-901490-015

20 087-901490-016

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


5-16 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Figure 5-6: Wiring for MicroStar® 7/8 GHz


ODU with MHSB Unequal Split
OPTION 201-901420-902 (Outdoor)
OPTION 201-901420-922 (Indoor)

24

21

22

23

42

25

2 2

2 087-099412-001 24 087-901490-021
21 087-901490-018 25 087-901490-022
22 087-901490-019 42 087-901490-024
23 087-901490-020

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Replacing an ODU Module 5-17

Figure 5-7: Wiring for a MicroStar® 7/8 GHz


with Space Diversity

OPTION 201-901420-903 (Outdoor)


OPTION 201-901420-923 (Indoor)

43

20

TROUBLESHOOTING
MAINTENANCE AND
19 44

2
2

2 087-099412-001 43 087-901490-017

19 087-901490-015 44 087-901490-023

20 087-901490-016

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


5-18 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Figure 5-8: Wiring for a MicroStar® 7/8 GHz


with Frequency Diversity

OPTION 201-901420-911 (Outdoor)


OPTION 201-901420-931 (Indoor)

43

63

61
19

2
2

2 087-099412-001 61 087-901490-027

19 087-901490-015 63 087-901490-028

43 087-901490-017

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Replacing an ODU Module 5-19

Figure 5-9: Wiring for a MicroStar® 7/8 GHz


with Frequency Diversity and Space Diversity

OPTION 201-901420-912 (Outdoor)


OPTION 201-901420-932 (Indoor)

43

20

TROUBLESHOOTING
MAINTENANCE AND
19 44

2
2

2 087-099412-001 43 087-901490-017

19 087-901490-015 44 087-901490-023

20 087-901490-016

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


5-20 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Figure 5-10: Wiring for a MicroStar® 7/8 GHz


Non-Protected Radio with 1-HPA

OPTION 201-901420-941 (Indoor)

20

64

65

2 087-099412-001 20 087-901490-016

64 087-901490-042 65 087-901490-043

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Replacing an ODU Module 5-21

Figure 5-11: Wiring for MicroStar® 7/8 GHz


ODU with MHSB Unequal Split and 2 HPAs

OPTION 201-901420-942 (Indoor)

24

22
67

23

21

TROUBLESHOOTING
MAINTENANCE AND
66

65

68

2
2

2 087-099412-001 24 087-901490-021

21 087-901490-018 65 087-901490-043

22 087-901490-019 66 087-901490-044

23 087-901490-020 67 087-901490-045

68 087-901490-046

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


5-22 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Figure 5-12: Wiring for a MicroStar® 7/8 GHz


with Space Diversity and 2-HPAs

OPTION 201-901420-943 (Indoor)

69

20

43
65

68

64

2 2

2 087-099412-001 65 087-901490-043

20 087-901490-016 68 087-901490-046

43 087-901490-017 69 087-901490-047

64 087-901490-042

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Replacing an ODU Module 5-23

Figure 5-13: Wiring for a MicroStar® 7/8 GHz


with Frequency Diversity and 2-HPAs

OPTION 201-901420-951 (Indoor)

70
63

TROUBLESHOOTING
MAINTENANCE AND
65
43

64
68

2 2

2 087-099412-001 65 087-901490-043

43 087-901490-017 68 087-901490-046

63 087-901490-028 70 087-901490-048

64 087-901490-042

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


5-24 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Figure 5-14: Wiring for a MicroStar® 7/8 GHz with


Space Diversity and Frequency Diversity, 2-HPAs

OPTION 201-901420-952 (Indoor)

69

20

43
65

68

64

2 2

2 087-099412-001 65 087-901490-043

20 087-901490-016 68 087-901490-046

43 087-901490-017 69 087-901490-047

64 087-901490-042

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Replacing an ODU Module 5-25

Figure 5-15: Wiring for an MHSB MicroStar® M 13/15/18 GHz


ODU

OPTION 201-901985-901

48

47

46 49

TROUBLESHOOTING
MAINTENANCE AND
50

6
6

6 087-099412-001 48 087-901490-031

46 087-901490-029 49 087-901490-032

47 087-901490-030 50 087-901490-033

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


5-26 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Figure 5-16: Wiring for a Non-Protected


MicroStar® M 13/15/18 GHz ODU

OPTION 201-901985-902

46

51

6 087-099412-001

46 087-901490-029

51 087-901490-034

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Replacing an ODU Module 5-27

Figure 5-17: Wiring for a MicroStar® M 13/15/18 GHz ODU


as Repeater

OPTION 201-901985-903

46 53

TROUBLESHOOTING
MAINTENANCE AND
51 52

6 6

6 087-099412-001 52 087-901490-035

46 087-901490-029 53 087-901490-036

51 087-901490-034 50 087-901490-033

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


5-28 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Changing the Frequency of the Radio

The frequency of the radio is set by programming the synthesizer and replacing
or retuning the diplexer (7/8 GHz band). You can set1 the synthesizer yourself
if the frequencies you require are within the frequency range of your
transceiver. The diplexer must be tuned at the factory. Note that, at 18 GHz, the
diplexers are of the wideband type.
Look at the label on the transceiver to determine its frequency range. You can
look at table 6-1 to determine the various frequency ranges. If the tuning range
is not appropriate, order a new transceiver with the correct tuning range and
order a diplexer for the frequencies that you wish to use.
Install the new transceiver as shown in figure 5-3 and the diplexer according to
figure 5-18.

Replacing the Diplexer

Traffic is interrupted during this procedure. You may


want to move traffic to alternate equipment (or
channel) before starting.

1. Remove traffic from the affected channel and switch off the radio.
2. Using a 5/16 in torque wrench, disconnect all coaxial cables from the ACU.
3. If the radio is protected, detach the RF switch from the diplexer.
4. Disconnect waveguide from the antenna port.
5. Using a hex driver, remove the eight screws (see figure 5-18) that hold the
diplexer to the radio. These screws are at the back of the radio unit.

1. Use the receive and transmit frequency setting functions in the configuration menu of the embedded
software or the CIT software.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Replacing an ODU Module 5-29

Figure 5-18: Diplexer Retaining Screws

TROUBLESHOOTING
MAINTENANCE AND
Retaining Screws (8)

6. Carefully pull the diplexer out of the back of the ODU.


7. Insert the new diplexer into the radio unit through the back of the ODU,
making sure that the square base of the diplexer goes into the hole
provided for it in the back wall of the ODU.
8. From the back of the ODU, attach the diplexer to the chassis with the eight
screws shown in figure 5-18.
9. Using the 5/6 in torque wrench, set to 0.1 kg·m (9.0 lb·in), re-attach the
coaxial cables removed in step 2.
10. If the radio is protected, re-attach the RF switch to the diplexer.
11. Close and latch the ODU door, tighten the two screws on the door to
1.6 N·m (14.4 lb·in) to prevent water infiltration.
12. Re-attach the waveguide to the antenna port.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


5-30 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


6
C H A P T E R

OPTIONS AND ORDERING


To maintain your microwave radio with a minimum of down time, your
organization will have to maintain a stock of spare units. To do so, you may
wish to order additional spares from time to time, to assure that you have
enough spares to properly maintain the system. In addition, after you replace a
faulty unit with a spare, you will want to return the faulty unit to Harris for
repair. This Chapter explains how to accomplish these tasks.

Ordering

OPTIONS AND
ORDERING
Part Numbers Versus Product Codes
The best way to identify an item that you wish to order from us is to give us a
part number. A part number identifies a specific part and is found on a label
affixed to the part, as shown in figure 6-1. On that label, there may also be a
product code, which is a more general number that identifies the most up to-
date part that serves a specific function. If possible, please provide the part
number.

Figure 6-1: Example Part Label


This Space Reserved for CLEI Code and Bar Code

24 Hour
Customer Service

USA Tel: 1-800-227-8332 or (650)-594-3800


SPU 16 E1 Balanced FAX: 1-650-594-3621
Product: RU2F13C
P/N: 201-901700-XXX Canada Tel: 1-800-227-8332 or (514)-421-8333
Issue: XX SN: MO212631 Fax: 1-514-685-4580

Issue Product Code Bar Code


Part Number Name Serial Number

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


6-2 OPTIONS AND ORDERING

Spare Unit Ordering Information

When you order spare parts for your existing system, refer to the parts list in
table 6-1. Where applicable, it is preferable to use the Product Code rather than
the Part Number1.

Placing the order


Address all orders for spare units to:

In Canada
Spare Parts Service Centre
Harris Corporation —
Microwave Communications Division
3 Hotel-de-Ville
Dollard-des-Ormeaux, Quebec
Canada H9B 3G4
Phone: 1 800 277-8332 or 1-514-421-8333
Fax: 1-514-685-4580

1. The part I.D. may be a part number, a product code or both. A part number has the format
xxx-xxxxxx-xxx, while a product code is a mix of letters and numbers.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Ordering 6-3

Selecting the ACU Option


To know which ACU option to use, you must know:
• the capacity of the radio
• the center frequency of the transmit signal
• the transmit to receive spacing (T/R spacing)
• whether the transmit frequency is higher or lower than the receive
frequency (T/R relationship).
Use the first two pieces of information and the formulas that follow to calculate
which part of the spectrum the transmit signal occupies:
B-
fh = fc + ------
1.5

B-
fl = fc – ------
1.5

Where:
fl is the lowest frequency occupied by the signal

OPTIONS AND
ORDERING
fh is the highest frequency occupied by the signal
fc is the center frequency of the signal
B is the bandwidth requirement of the radio.
The resulting range of frequencies must fit within the bandwidth of the
transmit filter of the ACU option selected.
The parts list gives the T/R spacing, the T/R relationship, and bandwidth of the
transmit filter for each ACU option.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


6-4 OPTIONS AND ORDERING

Table 6-1: MicroStar® System Spares and Accessories

PART No. DESCRIPTION COMMENTS


201-902105-001 Protection Unit, 2-16 E1/T1 option • For a protected
201-902105-002 Protection Unit, T3 option radio

201-902120-001 Signal Processing Unit, 2-16 E1 QPSK/16 QAM


201-902120-003 Signal Processing Unit, 2-16 T1 QPSK/16 QAM
• Programmable
201-902120-021 Signal Processing Unit, 8-16 E1 QPSK modulation
• Standard mount
201-902120-023 Signal Processing Unit, 8-16 T1 QPSK
201-902125-002 Signal Processing Unit, T3 QPSK/16 QAM
191-901425-001 Transceiver, 7.110 - 7.725 GHz
191-901425-002 Transceiver, 7.725 - 8.300 GHz
191-901425-003 Transceiver, 8.200 - 8.750 GHz • Order two per
191-901425-004 Transceiver, 6.590 - 7.125 GHz protected terminal.

191-901925-001 Transceiver, 14.400 - 15.350 GHz


191-901930-001 Transceiver, 17.700 - 19.700 GHz
Diplexer, Tuning Range:
101-901435-001 7.100 - 7.425 GHz Transmit,
7.100 - 7.425 GHz Receive • Specify the
transmit and
Diplexer, Tuning Range:
receive
101-901435-002 7.425 - 7.725 GHz Transmit,
frequencies.
7.425 - 7.725 GHz Receive
• Bandwidth is
Diplexer, Tuning Range: 60 MHz
101-901435-003 7.250 - 7.575 GHz Transmit,
7.250 - 7.575 GHz Receive

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Ordering 6-5

Table 6-1: MicroStar® System Spares and Accessories (Continued)

PART No. DESCRIPTION COMMENTS


Diplexer, Tuning Range:
101-901851-001 7.700 - 8.000 GHz Transmit,
7.700 - 8.000 GHz Receive
Diplexer, Tuning Range:
101-901851-002 8.000 - 8.300 GHz Transmit,
8.000 - 8.300 GHz Receive
• Specify the
Diplexer, Tuning Range: transmit and
101-901851-003 7.700 - 8.000 GHz Transmit, receive
8.000 - 8.300 GHz Receive frequencies.
Diplexer, Tuning Range: • For frequency
101-901851-004 8.000 - 8.300 Transmit, diversity radios
7.700 - 8.000 GHz Receive only, bandwidth is
30 MHz
Diplexer, Tuning Range:
101-901851-005 8.200 - 8.500 GHz Transmit,
8.200 - 8.500 GHz Receive
Diplexer, Tuning Range:
101-901851-006 8.500 - 8.750 GHz Transmit,
8.500 - 8.750 GHz Receive

OPTIONS AND
191-901852-101 ACU FD, ƒXMT = 7 110 - 7 425 MHz, ƒXMT = ƒRCV

ORDERING
• 7 GHz
191-901852-102 ACU FD, ƒXMT = 7 425 - 7 725 MHz, ƒXMT = ƒRCV • Freq. diversity
191-901852-103 ACU FD, ƒXMT = 7 110 - 7 425 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV configuration
• T/T = 56 MHz
191-901852-104 ACU FD, ƒXMT = 7 425 - 7 725 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901852-105 ACU FD, ƒXMT = 7 725 - 8 000 MHz, ƒXMT = ƒRCV
• 8 GHz, lower band
191-901852-106 ACU FD, ƒXMT = 8 000 - 8 275 MHz, ƒXMT = ƒRCV • Freq. diversity
191-901852-107 ACU FD, ƒXMT = 7 725 - 8 000 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV configuration
• T/T = 56 MHz
191-901852-108 ACU FD, ƒXMT = 8 000 - 8 275 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901852-109 ACU FD, ƒXMT = 8 200 - 8 500 MHz, ƒXMT = ƒRCV • 8 GHz, upper band
• Freq. diversity
191-901852-110 ACU FD, ƒXMT = 8 500 - 8 750 MHz, ƒXMT = ƒRCV configuration
• T/T = 56 MHz
191-901853-101 ACU FD/SD, ƒXMT = 7 110 - 7 425 MHz, ƒXMT = ƒRCV
• 7 GHz
191-901853-102 ACU FD/SD, ƒXMT = 7 425 - 7 725 MHz, ƒXMT = ƒRCV • Freq/Spc. diversity
191-901853-103 ACU FD/SD, ƒXMT = 7 110 - 7 425 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 63 MHz
191-901853-104 ACU FD/SD, ƒXMT = 7 425 - 7 725 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901853-105 ACU FD/SD, ƒXMT = 7 725 - 8 000 MHz, ƒXMT = ƒRCV
• 8 GHz, lower band
191-901853-106 ACU FD/SD, ƒXMT = 8 000 - 8 275 MHz, ƒXMT = ƒRCV • Freq/Spc. diversity
191-901853-107 ACU FD/SD, ƒXMT = 7 725 - 8 000 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 63 MHz
191-901853-108 ACU FD/SD, ƒXMT = 8 000 - 8 275 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


6-6 OPTIONS AND ORDERING

Table 6-1: MicroStar® System Spares and Accessories (Continued)

PART No. DESCRIPTION COMMENTS


191-901853-109 ACU FD/SD, ƒXMT = 8 200 - 8 500 MHz, ƒXMT = ƒRCV • 8 GHz, upper band
• Freq/Spc. diversity
191-901853-110 ACU FD/SD, ƒXMT = 8 500 - 8 750 MHz, ƒXMT = ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 63 MHz
191-901976-101 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 12 735 - 12 825 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901976-102 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 12 795 - 12 885 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901976-103 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 12 855 - 12 945 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 13 GHz
191-901976-104 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 12 915 - 13 005 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • Unprotected
191-901976-105 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 13 001 - 13 091 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 266 MHz
191-901976-106 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 13 061 - 13 151 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901976-107 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 13 121 - 13 211 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901976-108 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 13 181 - 13 271 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901976-201 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 12 735 - 12 825 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901976-202 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 12 795 - 12 885 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901976-203 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 12 855 - 12 945 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 13 GHz
191-901976-204 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 12 915 - 13 005 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • MHSB
191-901976-205 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 13 001 - 13 091 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 266 MHz
191-901976-206 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 13 061 - 13 151 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901976-207 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 13 121 - 13 211 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901976-208 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 13 181 - 13 271 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901977-111 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 370 - 14 550 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901977-112 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 500 - 14 680 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901977-113 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 630 - 14 810 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901977-114 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 760 - 14 940 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 15 GHz
191-901977-115 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 890 - 15 070 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • Unprotected
191-901977-116 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 685 - 14 865 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 315 MHz
191-901977-117 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 815 - 14 995 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901977-118 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 945 - 15 125 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901977-119 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 15 075 - 15 255 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901977-120 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 15 205 - 15 385 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Ordering 6-7

Table 6-1: MicroStar® System Spares and Accessories (Continued)

PART No. DESCRIPTION COMMENTS


191-901978-111 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 370 - 14 550 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901978-112 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 500 - 14 680 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901978-113 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 630 - 14 810 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901978-114 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 760 - 14 940 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 15 GHz
191-901978-115 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 890 - 15.070 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • Unprotected
191-901978-116 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 692 - 14 872 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 322 MHz
191-901978-117 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 822 - 15 002 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901978-118 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 952 - 15 132 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901978-119 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 15 082 - 15 262 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901978-120 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 15 212 - 15 392 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901979-101 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 350 - 14 530 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901979-102 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 500 - 14 680 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901979-103 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 650 - 14 830 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901979-104 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 800 - 14 980 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 15 GHz

OPTIONS AND
191-901979-105 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 950 - 15 130 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV

ORDERING
• Unprotected
191-901979-106 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 725 - 14 905 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 375 MHz
191-901979-107 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 875 - 15 055 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901979-108 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 15 025 - 15 205 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901979-109 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 15 175 - 15 355 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901979-110 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 15 325 - 15 505 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901986-101 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 350 - 14 530 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901986-102 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 500 - 14 680 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901986-103 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 575 - 14 755 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901986-104 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 650 - 14 830 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 15 GHz
191-901986-105 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 800 - 14 980 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • Unprotected
191-901986-106 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 770 - 14 950 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 420 MHz
191-901986-107 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 920 - 15 100 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901986-108 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 995 - 15 175 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901986-109 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 15 070 - 15 250 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901986-110 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 15 220 - 15 400 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


6-8 OPTIONS AND ORDERING

Table 6-1: MicroStar® System Spares and Accessories (Continued)

PART No. DESCRIPTION COMMENTS


191-901987-101 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 350 - 14 530 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901987-102 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 500 - 14 680 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901987-103 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 650 - 14 830 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 15 GHz
191-901987-104 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 800 - 14 980 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • Unprotected
191-901987-105 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 825 - 15 005 MHz, ƒXMT >ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 475 MHz
191-901987-106 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 975 - 15 155 MHz, ƒXMT >ƒRCV
191-901987-107 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 15 125 - 15 305 MHz, ƒXMT >ƒRCV
191-901987-108 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 15 275 - 15 455 MHz, ƒXMT >ƒRCV
191-901988-101 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 350 - 14 530 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901988-102 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 500 - 14 680 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901988-103 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 650 - 14 830 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 15 GHz
191-901988-104 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 800 - 14 980 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • Unprotected
191-901988-105 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 840 - 15 020 MHz, ƒXMT >ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 490 MHz
191-901988-106 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 990 - 15 170 MHz, ƒXMT >ƒRCV
191-901988-107 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 15 140 - 15 320 MHz, ƒXMT >ƒRCV
191-901988-108 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 15 290 - 15 470 MHz, ƒXMT >ƒRCV
191-901989-101 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 350 - 14 530 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 15 GHz
191-901989-102 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 14 500 - 14 680 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • Unprotected
191-901989-103 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 15 078 - 15 258 MHz, ƒXMT >ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 728 MHz
191-901989-104 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 15 228 - 15 408 MHz, ƒXMT >ƒRCV
191-901977-211 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 370 - 14 550 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901977-212 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 500 - 14 680 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901977-213 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 630 - 14 810 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901977-214 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 760 - 14 940 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 15 GHz
191-901977-215 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 890 - 15 070 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • MHSB
191-901977-216 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 685 - 14 865 MHz, ƒXMT >ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 315 MHz
191-901977-217 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 815 - 14 995 MHz, ƒXMT >ƒRCV
191-901977-218 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 945 - 15 125 MHz, ƒXMT >ƒRCV
191-901977-219 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 15 075 - 15 255 MHz, ƒXMT >ƒRCV
191-901977-220 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 15 205 - 15 385 MHz, ƒXMT >ƒRCV

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Ordering 6-9

Table 6-1: MicroStar® System Spares and Accessories (Continued)

PART No. DESCRIPTION COMMENTS


191-901978-211 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 370 - 14 550 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901978-212 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 500 - 14 680 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901978-213 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 630 - 14 810 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901978-214 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 760 - 14 940 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 15 GHz
191-901978-215 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 890 - 15 070 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • MHSB
191-901978-216 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 692 - 14 872 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 322 MHz
191-901978-217 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 822 - 15 002 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901978-218 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 952 - 15 132 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901978-219 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 15 082 - 15 262 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901978-220 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 15 212 - 15 392 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901979-201 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 350 - 14 530 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901979-202 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 500 - 14 680 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901979-203 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 650 - 14 830 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901979-204 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 800 - 14 980 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 15 GHz

OPTIONS AND
191-901979-205 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 950 - 15 130 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV

ORDERING
• MHSB
191-901979-206 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 725 - 14 905 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 375 MHz
191-901979-207 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 875 - 15 055 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901979-208 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 15 025 - 15 205 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901979-209 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 15 175 - 15 355 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901979-210 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 15 325 - 15 505 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901986-201 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 350 - 14 530 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901986-202 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 500 - 14 680 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901986-203 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 575 - 14 755 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901986-204 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 650 - 14 830 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 15 GHz
191-901986-205 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 800 - 14 980 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • MHSB
191-901986-206 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 770 - 14 950 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 420 MHz
191-901986-207 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 920 - 15 100 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901986-208 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 995 - 15 175 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901986-209 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 15 070 - 15 250 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901986-210 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 15 220 - 15 400 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


6-10 OPTIONS AND ORDERING

Table 6-1: MicroStar® System Spares and Accessories (Continued)

PART No. DESCRIPTION COMMENTS


191-901987-201 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 350 - 14 530 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901987-202 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 500 - 14 680 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901987-203 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 650 - 14 830 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 15 GHz
191-901987-204 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 800 - 14 980 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • MHSB
191-901987-205 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 825 - 15 005 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 475 MHz
191-901987-206 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 975 - 15 155 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901987-207 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 15 125 - 15 305 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901987-208 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 15 275 - 15 455 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901988-201 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 350 - 14 530 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901988-202 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 500 - 14 680 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901988-203 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 650 - 14 830 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 15 GHz
191-901988-204 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 800 - 14 980 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • MHSB
191-901988-205 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 840 - 15 020 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 490 MHz
191-901988-206 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 990 - 15 170 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901988-207 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 15 140 - 15 320 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901988-208 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 15 290 - 15 470 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901989-201 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 350 - 14 530 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
• 15 GHz
191-901989-202 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 14 500 - 14 680 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV • MHSB
191-901989-203 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 15 078 - 15 258 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 728 MHz
191-901989-204 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 15 228 - 15 408 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Ordering 6-11

Table 6-1: MicroStar® System Spares and Accessories (Continued)

PART No. DESCRIPTION COMMENTS


191-901994-101 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 17 595 - 17 795 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-102 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 17 690 - 17 890 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-103 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 17 785 - 17 985 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-104 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 17 880 - 18 080 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-105 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 17 975 - 18 175 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-106 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 070 - 18 270 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-107 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 165 - 18 365 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-108 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 260 - 18 460 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-109 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 355 - 18 555 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • 18 GHz
• Unprotected
191-901994-110 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 450 - 18 650 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
configuration
191-901994-111 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 545 - 18 745 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • T/R = 340 MHz
191-901994-112 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 593 - 18 793 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-113 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 640 - 18 840 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-114 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 735 - 18 935 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV

OPTIONS AND
191-901994-115 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 830 - 19 030 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV

ORDERING
191-901994-116 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 925 - 19 125 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-117 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 020 - 19 220 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-118 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 115 - 19 315 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-119 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 210 - 19 410 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


6-12 OPTIONS AND ORDERING

Table 6-1: MicroStar® System Spares and Accessories (Continued)

PART No. DESCRIPTION COMMENTS


191-901994-120 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 010 - 18 210 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-121 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 105 - 18 305 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-122 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 200 - 18 400 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-123 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 295 - 18 495 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-124 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 390 - 18 590 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-125 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 485 - 18 685 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-126 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 580 - 18 780 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-127 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 675 - 18 875 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-128 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 770 - 18 970 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV • 18 GHz
• Unprotected
191-901994-129 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 865 - 19 065 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
configuration
191-901994-130 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 960 - 19 160 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV • T/R = 340 MHz
191-901994-131 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 008 - 19 208 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-132 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 055 - 19 255 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-133 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 150 - 19 350 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-134 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 245 - 19 445 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-135 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 340 - 19 540 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-136 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 435 - 19 635 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-137 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 530 - 19 730 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-138 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 625 - 19 825 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-900170-101 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 17 670 - 18 870 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-900170-102 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 17 840 - 18 040 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-900170-103 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 010 - 18 210 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-900170-104 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 180 - 18 380 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-900170-105 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 350 - 18 550 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 18 GHz
191-900170-106 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 520 - 18 720 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • Unprotected
191-900170-107 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 680 - 18 880 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 1 010 MHz
191-900170-108 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 850 - 19 050 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-900170-109 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 020 - 19 220 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-900170-110 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 190 - 19 390 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-900170-111 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 360 - 19 560 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-900170-112 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 530 - 19 730 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Ordering 6-13

Table 6-1: MicroStar® System Spares and Accessories (Continued)

PART No. DESCRIPTION COMMENTS


191-900175-101 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 17 670 - 17 870 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-900175-102 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 17 710 - 17 910 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-900175-103 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 17 840 - 18 040 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 18 GHz
191-900175-104 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 010 - 18 210 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • Unprotected
191-900175-105 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 230 - 19 430 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 1 560 MHz
191-900175-106 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 270 - 19 470 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-900175-107 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 400 - 19 600 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-900175-108 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 570 - 19 770 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-900195-101 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 17 670 - 17 870 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-900195-102 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 17 840 - 18 040 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 18 GHz
191-900195-103 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 18 010 - 18 210 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • Unprotected
191-900195-104 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 285 - 19 485 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 1 615 MHz
191-900195-105 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 455 - 19 655 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-900195-106 ACU UNP, ƒXMT = 19 625 - 19 825 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV

OPTIONS AND
191-901994-201 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 17 595 - 17 795 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV

ORDERING
191-901994-202 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 17 690 - 17 890 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-203 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 17 785 - 17 985 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-204 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 17 880 - 18 080 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-205 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 17 975 - 18 175 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-206 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 070 - 18 270 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-207 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 165 - 18 365 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-208 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 260 - 18 460 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-209 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 355 - 18 555 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • 18 GHz
• MHSB
191-901994-210 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 450 - 18 650 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
configuration
191-901994-211 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 545 - 18 745 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • T/R = 340 MHz
191-901994-212 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 593 - 18 793 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-213 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 640 - 18 840 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-214 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 735 - 18 935 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-215 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 830 - 19 030 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-216 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 925 - 19 125 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-217 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 020 - 19 220 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-218 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 115 - 19 315 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-901994-219 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 210 - 19 410 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


6-14 OPTIONS AND ORDERING

Table 6-1: MicroStar® System Spares and Accessories (Continued)

PART No. DESCRIPTION COMMENTS


191-901994-220 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 010 - 18 210 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-221 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 105 - 18 305 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-222 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 200 - 18 400 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-223 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 295 - 18 495 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-224 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 390 - 18 590 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-225 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 485 - 18 685 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-226 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 580 - 18 780 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-227 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 675 - 18 875 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-228 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 770 - 18 970 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV • 18 GHz
• MHSB
191-901994-229 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 865 - 19 065 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
configuration
191-901994-230 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 960 - 19 160 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV • T/R = 340 MHz
191-901994-231 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 008 - 19 208 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-232 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 055 - 19 255 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-233 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 150 - 19 350 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-234 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 245 - 19 445 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-235 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 340 - 19 540 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-236 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 435 - 19 635 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-237 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 530 - 19 730 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-901994-238 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 625 - 19 825 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-900170-201 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 17 670 - 18 870 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-900170-202 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 17 840 - 18 040 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-900170-203 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 010 - 18 210 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-900170-204 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 180 - 18 380 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-900170-205 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 350 - 18 550 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 18 GHz
191-900170-206 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 520 - 18 720 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • MHSB
191-900170-207 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 680 - 18 880 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 1 010 MHz
191-900170-208 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 850 - 19 050 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-900170-209 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 020 - 19 220 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-900170-210 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 190 - 19 390 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-900170-211 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 360 - 19 560 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-900170-212 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 530 - 19 730 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Ordering 6-15

Table 6-1: MicroStar® System Spares and Accessories (Continued)

PART No. DESCRIPTION COMMENTS


191-900175-201 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 17 670 - 17 870 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-900175-202 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 17 710 - 17 910 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-900175-203 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 17 840 - 18 040 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 18 GHz
191-900175-204 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 010 - 18 210 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • MHSB
191-900175-205 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 230 - 19 430 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 1 560 MHz
191-900175-206 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 270 - 19 470 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-900175-207 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 400 - 19 600 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-900175-208 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 570 - 19 770 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-900195-201 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 17 670 - 17 870 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
191-900195-202 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 17 840 - 18 040 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV
• 18 GHz
191-900195-203 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 18 010 - 18 210 MHz, ƒXMT < ƒRCV • MHSB
191-900195-204 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 285 - 19 485 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV configuration
• T/R = 1 615 MHz
191-900195-205 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 455 - 19 655 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV
191-900195-206 ACU MHSB, ƒXMT = 19 625 - 19 825 MHz, ƒXMT > ƒRCV

OPTIONS AND
• Mounting ODU

ORDERING
099-901420-001 ODU Bracket Mounting Kit
outdoors.
• Mounting ODU
099-901805-002 ODU Bracket Mounting Kit
indoors.
Cable kit to connect SPU to ODU
099-901208-001 (C2FP, by Andrews Corp., or equivalent): 45.7 m
(150’)
• Kit contains C2FP-
Cable kit to connect SPU to ODU type cable, sealing
099-901208-002 (C2FP, by Andrews Corp., or equivalent): 91.4 m kit, 2 N-type
(300’) connectors, and 3
Cable kit to connect SPU to ODU grounding kits.
099-901208-003 (C2FP, by Andrews Corp., or equivalent): 152.4 m • One coaxial cable
(500’) is required per
ODU.
Cable kit to connect SPU to ODU
099-901208-004 (C2FP, by Andrews Corp., or equivalent): 213.3 m
(700’)
• Use the XXX field
of the part number
Cable to connect SPU to ODU (Andrews LDF2-50, to specify the
087-099499-XXX
heliax type) length in 25-foot
increments, from
25 feet to 999 feet.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


6-16 OPTIONS AND ORDERING

Table 6-1: MicroStar® System Spares and Accessories (Continued)

PART No. DESCRIPTION COMMENTS


• Only ONE required
per repeater site.
099-902001-001 PCMCIA Orderwire Kit
Includes PCMCIA
card and cables.
• Spare cable for
087-902211-001 Cable RJ-11/RJ-45 orderwire. EMI
protected
• Spare phone cable
098-902008-001 Kit cable phone EMI for orderwire. EMI
Protected.
• PCMCIA card and
cables for
099-902203-001 PCMCIA CBL 2 CHANNEL RS-232
FARSCAN
connection.
• Spare null modem
087-900468-001 Cable Null Modem DB9
cable
• Order three per
103-097885-416 Grounding kit for LDF2-50 coaxial cable ODU if using LDF2-
50 coaxial cable.
098-093607-001 Outdoor Sealing kit, Cold Shrink —
101-901415-001 BNC Connector Panel (4 E1, Unbalanced Option) • Optional.
• Occupies one rack-
101-901415-002 BNC Connector Panel (8 E1, Unbalanced Option) mount space.
Cable with 50-pin Connector, Balanced Option,
098-901250-001
32.5 Ft.
098-901250-002 Cable with 50-pin Connector, Balanced Option, 10 Ft. • Optional.
098-901250-003 Cable with 50-pin Connector, Balanced Option, 20 Ft. • 8 E1 or DS1

Cable with 50-pin Connector, Balanced Option,


098-901250-004
100 Ft.
50-pin Amphenol to 8 BNC cable assembly adapter • Optional.
087-901346-001
(1.5ft.) • For 4 E1
50-pin Amphenol to 8 BNC cable assembly adapter Tributaries,
087-901346-003 Unbalanced.
(9 ft.)
50-pin Amphenol to 16 BNC cable assembly adapter
087-901346-002 • Optional.
(1.5ft.)
• For 8 E1
50-pin Amphenol to 16 BNC cable assembly adapter Tributaries
087-901346-004
(9 ft.)
098-020016-260 50-pin Amphenol to wirewrap adapter • Optional.
• Optional
equipment.
098-901202-003 Hand Held Terminal (Keypad Display)
Required if Web-
CIT is not used.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Ordering 6-17

Table 6-1: MicroStar® System Spares and Accessories (Continued)

PART No. DESCRIPTION COMMENTS


• Optional
087-900271-480 Cable for Hand-held terminal
equipment.
• Order only if the
091-020085-703 Telephone, handset SPM with orderwire
is ordered.
098-901202-001 ODU Installation Kit • Optional
• Optional
equipment. Order
where required
098-901202-002 Sun shield (Refer to ’Install
the optional sun
shield’ on page 3-6
for guidance
Network/Protection Cable (connects RPTR (IN) port to • Optional
087-020193-702
the RPTR (OUT) port, 7 ft. long • One needed for a
repeater
Network/Protection Cable (connects RPTR (IN) port to
087-020193-703 configuration
the RPTR (OUT) port, 15 ft. long
• Two needed for
repeater
Network/Protection Cable (connects RPTR (IN) port to

OPTIONS AND
087-020193-704 configuration with
the RPTR (OUT) port, 25 ft. long.

ORDERING
spur.
DB 25 Male / RJ-45 adapter for repeater cable
042-020065-700
interconnection between Type-I/III and Type-II IDUs
042-020065-701 Null modem adapter, DB 9, pins 2&3 reverser • Optional
042-020065-702 Adapter gender changer, DB 25 Female
042-020065-703 Adapter RJ 45/DB 9 Male, shielded
098-093607-027 Installation Tool Kit for the MicroStar® • One per order
• Brackets for flush
098-901202-006 Install Kit 1 RMS Flush Mount mounting SPU or
PU.
• One is
automatically
IMN-902220-EXX Extra Instruction Manual (English)
shipped with each
order
• One is
automatically
IGD-902220-EXX Extra Installation Guide (English)
shipped with each
terminal
CD ROM containing instructions manual and
CDR-902220-EXX
installation guide.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


6-18 OPTIONS AND ORDERING

Table 6-1: MicroStar® System Spares and Accessories (Continued)

PART No. DESCRIPTION COMMENTS


• Tools required to
install connectors
099-901206-001 Cable installation tools for C2FP and (RG-8/U) cables
on C2FP and (RG-
8/U) cables
• Tools required to
099-901207-001 Cable installation tools for LDF2-50 install connectors
on LDF2-50 cable
• Use the XXX field
to specify the
087-099499-XXX Cable to connect SPU/PU to ODU (Andrew LDF2-50) length in 10 ft
increments, from
10 ft to 1000 ft.
• For connecting
SCSI-3 cable kit with 2-68 pin male connectors,
087-902159-008 Protection ports on
shielded 30 AWG, 80 Ω,
the SPU and PU
• Each coaxial cable
099-099500-002 Extra grounding kit for LDF2-50 coaxial cable requires at least
3 grounding kits.
099-099500-001 Extra Sealing kit
• One only supplied
per SPU and 2 per
protected terminal
• Cable supplied by
099-902158-001 Kit Connector for DC power cable, male D-sub
customer — use
AWG 18 wire,
2-conductor cable
only
098-901250-001 Cable with 50-pin Connector, Balanced Option,
• Optional
32.5 ft.
098-901250-003 Cable with 50-pin Connector, Balanced Option, 20 ft. • Optional
098-901250-002 Cable with 50-pin Connector, Balanced Option, 10 ft. • Optional
50-pin Amphenol to 8 BNC cable harness assembly,
087-901346-001
1.5 ft. • Optional
50-pin Amphenol to 8 BNC cable harness assembly, • For 4 E1
087-901346-003
9 ft.
098-020016-260 50-pin Amphenol to wirewrap adapter • Optional

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Ordering 6-19

Table 6-1: MicroStar® System Spares and Accessories (Continued)

PART No. DESCRIPTION COMMENTS


• Includes terminal
101-099435-001 Hand Held Terminal
and cable
• For use with SPM
091-020085-704 Telephone with optional
orderwire only
• At least one is
automatically
IMN-902220-E0X Extra Instruction Manual (English)
shipped with each
order
• One automatically
IGD-902220-E0X Extra Installation Guide (English) shipped with each
per terminal

OPTIONS AND
ORDERING

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


6-20 OPTIONS AND ORDERING

Customer Service Information

Quality Policy

Harris Microwave Communications Division's value system focuses on


customer satisfaction, continuous process improvement, and growth through
new products.

Standard Product Warranty

Harris Microwave Communications Division, (hereafter Harris MCD),


warrants that each product of its own manufacture shall, at the time of delivery
and for a period of twenty-four (24) months thereafter, be free from defects in
materials and workmanship. For such products that are installed by Harris
MCD, this warranty shall extend for eighteen (18) months from date of
installation, provided that the time from the date of delivery to the date of
installation does not exceed six months. Such warranty shall not include any
consumable components to which a specific manufacturer's guarantee applies.
If any Harris MCD product shall prove to be defective in materials or
workmanship under normal intended usage, operation and maintenance
during the applicable warranty period as determined by Harris MCD after
examination of the product claimed to be defective, then Harris MCD shall
repair or replace, at Harris MCD's sole option, such defective product, in
accordance with procedures specified below, at its own expense, exclusive,
however, of the cost of labor by the customer's own employees, agents or
contractors in identifying, removing or replacing the defective part(s) of the
product.
In composite equipment assemblies and systems, which include equipment of
such other than Harris MCD manufacture, Harris MCD's responsibility under
this warranty provision for the non Harris MCD manufactured portion of the
equipment shall be limited to the other equipment manufacturer's standard
warranty. Provided, however, that if the other manufacturer's standard
warranty period is of a shorter duration than the warranty period applicable to
Harris MCD's manufactured equipment, then Harris MCD shall extend
additional coverage to such other equipment manufacturer's warranty equal to
the differential in time between the expiration of the other manufacturer's
warranty and the duration of Harris MCD's manufactured equipment warranty
applicable to such order.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Customer Service Information 6-21

Harris MCD shall repair or replace, at Harris MCD's sole option, such other
manufacturer's defective part(s) within sixty (60) days after receipt of such
parts by Harris MCD in accordance with the below specified procedures, at
Harris MCD's own expense, exclusive, however, of cost of labor by the
customer's own employees, agents or contractors in identifying, removing or
replacing the defective part(s) of the product.
An authorization to return products to Harris MCD under this warranty must
be obtained from a Harris MCD representative prior to making shipment to
Harris MCD's plant, and all returns shall be shipped freight prepaid. Collect
shipments will not be accepted, but Harris MCD will prepay return freight
charges on repaired and replaced products found to be actually defective.
Liability of Harris MCD for breach of any and all warranties hereunder is
expressly limited to the repair or replacement of defective products as set forth
in this Chapter, and in no event shall Harris MCD be liable for special,
incidental or consequential damages by reason of any breach of warranty or
defect in materials or workmanship. Harris MCD shall not be responsible for
repair or replacement of products which have been subjected to neglect,
accident or improper use, or which have been altered by other than authorized
Harris MCD personnel.

OPTIONS AND
ORDERING
The foregoing warranties are in lieu of all other
warranties whether oral, written, expressed, implied, or
statutory. In particular, the implied warranties of fitness
for particular purpose and merchantability are hereby
disclaimed and shall not be applicable either from Harris
MCD or any other equipment manufacturer. Harris
MCD's warranty obligations and buyer's remedies
thereunder are solely and exclusively as stated herein.
In no case shall Harris MCD be liable for indirect kinds
of damages, including but not limited to special,
incidental, and consequential damages, or loss of
capital, revenue, or profits. In no event shall Harris
MCD's liability to buyer, or any party claiming through
buyer, be in excess of the actual sales price paid by
buyer for any items supplied hereunder.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


6-22 OPTIONS AND ORDERING

Services Offered

• Technical assistance from highly qualified Product Support engineers


to resolve technical questions / problems on the phone.
• Field Service support to resolve equipment problems on site by highly
professional Field Service engineers.
• Repair of equipment at our Repair & Return facilities in a timely and
cost-effective manner.
• Customers may benefit from the Harris MCD Refurbish and Retune
Program to ensure that their systems will continue to operate at optimal
performance as well as benefit from the latest engineering
improvements which we continue to implement into Harris MCD
products.
• 24-hour emergency telephone support by highly qualified Product
Support engineers for traffic affecting or traffic threatening problems.
• 24-hour emergency shipment of replacement parts on selected items to
minimize downtime.
• Product training by highly qualified instructors that maximizes product
performance and minimizes maintenance costs.

Technical Assistance Center

Our Technical Assistance Center (TAC) is staffed with factory trained and
highly qualified Product Support staff whose task is to provide telephone
support to resolve complex customer equipment problems quickly and
accurately in a timely manner. Customers who completed product training
given by Harris MCD and are equipped with proper test equipment and spare
parts will experience quick resolution of their equipment problems.
Harris Corporation —
Microwave Communications Division
330 Twin Dolphin Drive
Redwood Shores, CA 94065-1421, USA
Phone: 1-800-227-8332 or 1-650-594-3800
Fax: 1-650-594-3621

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Customer Service Information 6-23

Harris Corporation —
Microwave Communications Division
3 Hotel-de-Ville
Dollard-des-Ormeaux, Quebec
Canada H9B 3G4
Phone: 1 800 277-8332 or 1-514-421-8333
Fax: 1-514-685-4580
Harris S.A. de C.V.
Ejército Nacional No. 926
Primer piso,
Colonia Palmas Polanco
Mexico, D.F. C.P. 11560
Phone: +52-55-5-249 3700
Fax: +52-55-5-249 3701 & 02
Harris Corporation — Philippines
For Asian customers only
8/F Pacific Star Building
Sen. Gil Puyat, corner Makati Ave.

OPTIONS AND
Makati City, Philippines

ORDERING
Phone: +63-2-818-5111
Fax: +63-2-818-8165
Harris Corporation — Malaysia
1109B, 10th Floor, Block E
Kelana Parkview Tower, Unit No.1, Jalan SS 6/2,
Kelana Jaya, 47301 Petaling Jaya, Selangor,
Malaysia
Phone: +603-704-6303
Fax: +603-703-1814
Harris Comm. (Shenzhen) LTD.
R3-B2 High-Tech Industrial Park
Nanshan District, Shenzhen 518057
The People’s Republic of China
Phone: +86-755-663-7928
Fax: +86-755-663-7048

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


6-24 OPTIONS AND ORDERING

Harris do Brasil Ltda.


Alameda Rio Negro, 1030
2o. andar, CJ-202/4/6
Alphaville
Barueri, SP
CEP - 06454-000
Tel: 4197 3000
Fax: 4197 3001
Customer Service: 4197 3201
Harris Corporation —Colombia
Orbecom
C/o: Harris Microwave Division
Calle 101, No. 44-58
Bogota, Colombia
Ph: +571-533-0912
e-mail: wotero@harris.com <mailto:wotero@harris.com>
Harris Communication S.A.
Centrale Parc, Bât. 4, Immeuble Pasteur
Avenue Sully Prodhomme
France 92298
Fax S&S: +(33) 1 55 52 80 12
Hotline: +(33) 1 55 52 80 80
Customer Mail box: custemea@harris.com

Visit our customer service web site at:


http://www.microwave.harris.com/cservice

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Customer Service Information 6-25

24-Hour Technical Assistance

Technical support is available 24 hours per day, seven days a week. Product
Support Engineers are available in the USA from 6:30am to 5pm PST, Monday
through Friday, and 7:30am to 5:00pm EST in Canada. At all other times, our
Product Support Engineers will return your call within 30 minutes whenever
you have traffic affecting or traffic threatening situations. Call us at
1-800-227-8332. For International, call us at 1-514-421-8333 or fax to
1-514-421-3555. Please provide us with the following information when you
call:
1. Your name, company and telephone number.
2. Equipment type and Sales Order number or FWL number found at the
bottom of the rack.
3. Detailed description of the problem.

Repair and Return

OPTIONS AND
Harris MCD repairs all its manufactured products as well as coordinates

ORDERING
repairs on vendor items which are part of its systems. The standard repair turn
around time for current production models is 5 working days upon receipt of
the defective parts. The part number listing following this section shows which
items are current production models by the designator “RBP” or “SOB.”
Standard repair turn around time for other products is 15 working days.
Manufacturing Discontinued items repair turnaround is subject to the
availability of parts.
Repair charges and turn around time for OEM (vendor) items are set by Harris
MCD suppliers. Our close working relationships with our suppliers assure us of
the best repair prices and turn around time.
Call 1-800-227-8332 or 1-514-421-8333 (Canada), or fax your
request to 1-514-421-3555.

Repair and Exchange Warranty

Harris MCD's warranty policy is as follows:


Repair Warranty 90 days
Exchange Warranty 90 days
and/or the remainder of the original product warranty period, whichever is
greater.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


6-26 OPTIONS AND ORDERING

Module Exchange

You may prefer to receive a replacement unit before you send your defective
unit to us. Harris MCD maintains an inventory of many different modules that
can be shipped to you within 24 hours. Parts requiring retune can be shipped
within 48 hours.
Emergency exchange is available with a 24 hour turnaround for current
production models of some products and 48 hours for other products.
Emergency exchanges are billed at actual exchange prices (zero for warranty
units) plus 200.00 USD per unit regardless of warranty status.
All exchanged units must be returned to us within 20 calendar days (domestic)
/ 45 calendar days (international) from date of shipment to avoid getting
invoiced for the difference between the exchange price and the list price.
The returned unit must match the product specification of the advance
exchange unit like for like. If the returned unit is non-repairable you will be
invoiced for the difference between the exchange price and the list price. The
unit will be discarded unless advised otherwise.

Return Material Authorization

Before sending in your equipment for repair, please call us at


1-800-227-8332 or 1-514-421-8333, (Repair and Return) or fax your
request to 1-514-421-3555. See the last page in this Chapter for the rapid
request RMA form. This will ensure that the repairs will be done in a timely
manner and eliminate any delays due to incomplete information. Please
provide us with the following information when you call us.
1. Your name, company and telephone number.
2. Equipment type, part number, serial number and FWL number found at
the bottom of the rack.
3. Detailed description of the problem.
4. Purchase order number.
5. Billing and shipping addresses.
6. Any special return packing or shipping instructions.
7. Customs clearance information if from overseas.
Please return the part with a ‘Trouble Reporting Tag’ attached to it to the
address provided by the return coordinators.
Tags illustrated in figure 6-2 are supplied with the equipment when shipped
from Harris.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Customer Service Information 6-27

Figure 6-2: Sample Trouble Reporting Tag

Product:
RMA:
Part Number:
Serial Number: Sales Order:
Frequency: Configuration / Strapping:
Software Version:
Contact Name: Tel:
E-mail: Fax:

Failure Type Occured


Steady At start-up
Intermittent Each time:
Temperature Sensitive: After certain period:
Microphonic

Problem Description
Output Power Lightning Hit
AGC / RSL Blows Fuse / Breaker Trip
Communication Port Does not turn on

OPTIONS AND
Software Problem Test to Specifications

ORDERING
Errors / Sync Loss Upgrade as per ECO or CSB
Unstable Frequency Realign
Physical / Electrical Damage Option Change / Re-tune
Protection / Switching Problem
Shows Alarm (specify):
Comments:

*You will be asked to provide the following information when contacting us for the RMA#:
1-A return shipping and billing address
2-A Purchase Order Number if the order will be non-warranty or requesting an exchange
unit regardless of warranty status

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


6-28 OPTIONS AND ORDERING

Restocking Charge

An incremental charge, calculated as a percentage of the current list price, is


invoiced as per the following table for exchanged units returned later than the
20 calendar days (domestic) / 45 calendar days (international) from date of
shipment:
1- 45 days overdue 15% charge
46-120 days overdue 45% charge
> 120 days overdue no returns accepted.
You will be invoiced for the difference between the exchange price and the list
price.

Emergency Repair

Emergency repair is available with a 24 hour turn around time for products that
are of current production and 48 hours for other products. Turnaround time
for Manufacturing Discontinued items is subject to the nature of the problems.
Emergency repairs are billed at actual repair price (zero for warranty units)
plus 200.00 USD per unit regardless of warranty status. Our normal shipping
time is 4:00 PM unless special shipping instructions are requested.

Equipment Damaged During Shipment

Please check for shipping damage when your equipment


is received.

Inspect all cartons at the time of delivery. Visible damage should be brought to
the attention of the carrier at once. In the event of concealed damage, keep the
shipping container, packing material and equipment intact. It is your
responsibility to file any claims for damage or loss with the carrier.
After the carrier has inspected the damaged material, contact Harris' Repair
Administration Department to obtain a return authorization, then return the
damaged equipment to Harris. Once repair costs including any and all
associated freight costs have been established, you will be advised and these
charges may be included in your claim. Harris will make every effort to expedite
replacement of damaged goods that are the result of shipping damage.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Customer Service Information 6-29

Evaluation Fee

There is a 195.00 USD evaluation charge per unit if no problem is found and no
repair is required.

Irreparable Units

Equipment which has been damaged due to customer negligence or which has
parts removed will be repaired at prevailing flat repair fee or on a time and
material basis whichever is higher regardless of the warranty status. Any
equipment that we have determined to be irreparable, will be returned to the
customer. A 195.00 USD evaluation fee will be assessed. This fee will be
credited if the customer purchases a replacement unit within 30 days.

Return Freight

Harris MCD prepays standard return freight back to our customers. Return

OPTIONS AND
freight back to customers on billable repairs is invoiced to the customers. A

ORDERING
200.00 USD handling charge is added in excess of freight charges for
international shipments.
Incoming shipments should be sent DDU (delivered duty unpaid). Outgoing
shipments will be sent EXW (EX Works), Service Center locations.
Customers are responsible for clearance and insurance of goods (except for
USA / Canada custom clearance).
The customer pays for shipping units to Harris MCD for both warranty and out-
of warranty repairs. Harris does not accept inbound shipments that are C.O.D.
Special shipping requests may be subject to additional charge.

Please make sure to pack the unit in such a way as to


prevent electrostatic discharge and physical damage in
transit.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


6-30 OPTIONS AND ORDERING

On-Site Field Service Repair

Harris MCD factory trained Field Service engineers are available to perform
on-site repairs on an as needed basis when telephone assistance can not be
effectively rendered. All requests for on-site assistance should be made to
Technical Assistance Center. Call the Technical Assistance Center nearest you.

Annual Repair Service Program (ARSP)

Our ARSP service will assure you that all your repairs will be covered for a
minimal fee paid up front. Repairs will be processed immediately and
unexpected large repair expenses will be avoided. Only Harris MCD
manufactured units are covered by the Annual Repair Service Program. The
antenna system as well as OEM equipment like the channel banks are excluded.
This warranty extension excludes any units deemed “irreparable”
due to misuse or abuse of the units and replacement of parts
subject to normal wear and tear. Equipment must be in good operating
condition prior to purchasing a warranty extension service.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Customer Service Information 6-31

Customer Training

Harris MCD offers courses in microwave, lightwave and multiplex system


operation designed to maximize product performance and minimize
maintenance costs. Regular classes are held in some of our North-American
and International facilities. For information on currently available courses and
training locations, please visit our WEB site at
http://www.microwave.harris.com/cservice/ctmain.htm
Special classes can be held at customer sites. Training is available for standard
products. All other training requirements must be quoted by the Customer
Training Department.

OPTIONS AND
ORDERING

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


6-32 OPTIONS AND ORDERING

General Training Policy

• Quoted prices are in USD unless noted otherwise.


• Class size is limited to 12 students maximum, except for FarScan™
courses which are limited to 6, unless specified otherwise.
• Training manuals are provided by Harris.
• Courses are in English unless specified otherwise.
• A Purchase Order is required to confirm registration.
• A cancellation fee of 50% will be applied if a customer cancels a
scheduled class or reservation in a pre-scheduled class within three
weeks of the scheduled date.
• A cancellation fee of 100% will be applied if a customer cancels a
scheduled class or reservation in a pre-scheduled class within one week
of the scheduled date.
• The Customer shall provide traffic-free radio equipment, computer(s),
(if required), and test equipment when training is held at locations
other than at a Harris Training and Education Center.
• All pre-scheduled courses can be canceled or postponed at the
discretion of Harris three weeks prior to the scheduled date if the
minimum attendance is not met.
• All Quoted prices are valid for a period of ninety (90) days.
• Courses cannot be filmed, videotaped or recorded.
• Students attending courses are responsible for arranging for their
meals, accommodations and transportation.
• An attendance of 100% is required of each student to complete the
course and to be awarded a certificate of completion.
• Training is provided free of charge in a regular scheduled class at one of
the Harris Training and Education Centers for up to four (4) students
for single orders valued at $500K or more. Orders for less than $500K
do not earn free training seats, nor can be used to combine with other
purchases to earn free seats. Free training earned must be completed
within one year of Sales Order shipment.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


RAPID REQUEST FOR RETURN RMA #:
MATERIAL AUTHORIZATION FORM

Microwave
Your Billing Address Your Shipping Address
Communications Division

FOR INQUIRIES CALL:1 800 277-8332


INTERNATIONAL: 1-514-421-8333

Contact name: Tel: Contact name: Tel:


Fax: Fax:
(Form # 2041-4)
PURCHASE ORDER#: ______________ IMPORTANT: FAX A HARD COPY OF THE PURCHASE ORDER WITH THIS FORM.

Item SERIAL NO. PART #, MODEL & OPTION PART DESCRIPTION FAULT PRICE
1
$
SW Version: Standard Warranty - Provide Sales Order: _____________ Repair
Emergency (Add $200.00US) Non-Warranty Advance Replacement (Exchange)
2
$
SW Version: Standard Warranty - Provide Sales Order: _____________ Repair
Emergency (Add $200.00US) Non-Warranty Advance Replacement (Exchange)
3
$
SW Version: Standard Warranty - Provide Sales Order: _____________ Repair
Emergency (Add $200.00US) Non-Warranty Advance Replacement (Exchange)
4
$
SW Version: Standard Warranty - Provide Sales Order: _____________ Repair
Emergency (Add $200.00US) Non-Warranty Advance Replacement (Exchange)
5
$
SW Version: Standard Warranty - Provide Sales Order: _____________ Repair
Emergency (Add $200.00US) Non-Warranty Advance Replacement (Exchange)

TOTAL $

IMPORTANT!
We will ship according to our standard methods unless otherwise stated on your purchase order.
Any special shipping instructions will be subject to additional fees regardless of warranty status.
*** Any missing information will result in a delay in processing your order ***
RAPID ACCESS INSTRUCTIONS
A Return Material Authorization (RMA) from Harris, Microwave Communications Division, is required before any material can be sent in for repair.
Units sent to Harris without an RMA will be subject to delays in processing. To arrange for repair or exchange service, contact our Customer Service
Department for an RMA number. In Canada/USA, call 1-800-227-8332, or International, call 1-514-421-8333, or simply fax the first part of this form
to 1-514-421-3555. An RMA number will then be faxed back to you within 24 hours.
Instructions in completing the Rapid RMA form.
1. Fill in your company name, telephone and fax numbers, shipping and billing address, and name of contact person.
2. Provide a Purchase Order # assigned exclusively to this order. This form will be faxed back to you within 24 hours with your RMA number and repair
pricing information.
3. Provide serial number of unit, if applicable, complete part number or SD number and option, description of part and frequency, if applicable, and an
accurate description of problems or symptoms observed. Include all alarms observed when the unit failed.
4. Select the urgency of your request. Standard or Emergency. Standard repair is 5 working days turnaround time for current production models and
15 working days for discontinued models. Emergency repair is 1 working day turnaround time for current production models and 2 working days for
discontinued models.
5. Provide warranty information. Warranty or Non-Warranty. If still under new product warranty, provide the Harris Original Sales Order number found
at the bottom of each radio or on the original invoice. If repeat failure and serviced during the last 90 days, provide the last RMA number.
6. Select the type of service requested, Repair or Module Advance Replacement (Exchange).
7. Harris, Microwave Communications Division, will return ship according to its standard method unless otherwise specified by the customer.
International shipments MUST INCLUDE necessary customs clearance information including exact instructions and any critical wordings. Attach a
separate sheet if necessary.
8. Pack the equipment well observing approved ESD guidelines and ship to the address specified on this form. Please reference the Harris RMA# on all
your shipping documentation and packages.
9. All equipment is to be shipped prepaid. Harris will not accept collect shipments.

Thank you.
A
A P P E N D I X

CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS

SPU Front Panel Ports and Connections

Figure A-1: Unbalanced Tributary Connections (DS 3 Option)

CONNECTOR PIN-
DS3-IN2 DS3-IN1

OUTS
PIN DESCRIPTION
CENTRE TRIBUTARY DATA
SHIELD GROUND

Figure A-2: Connection for Serial Interface with a Handheld


Terminal or a VT-100 Terminal

DCD_DIS 1
TERMINAL

DSR_DIS 6
DIS_RX 2
CTS_DIS 7
DIS_TX 3
CTS_DIS 8
DTR_DIS 4
+5VB 9
GROUND 5

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


A-2 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS

Figure A-3: Connection for Serial Interface with user’s


Equipment

DCD_DAT 1

DATA (RS-232)
DSR_DAT 6
DAT_RX 2
CTS_DAT 7
DAT_TX 3
CTS_DAT 8
DTR_DAT 4
+5VB 9
GROUND 5

Figure A-4: Power Supply Connection

+/-
BATT

Figure A-5: Network Connection for SNMP, FTP or any IP

10BASE-T

NMS

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


SPU Front Panel Ports and Connections A-3

Figure A-6: Connection through the Relay/Alarms Port


(SPU)

Pin Description
1 Ground
14 No Connection
2 No Connection
15 No Connection
3 No Connection
16 No Connection
4 No Connection
17 No Connection
5 SUM alarm common Sum Alarm
18 Open = No SUM alarm
6 Closed = No SUM alarm Relay
19 SPU alarm common SPU Alarm
7 Open = No SPU alarm
Relay
20 Closed = No SPU alarm
8 ODU alarm common ODU Alarm
21 Open = No ODU alarm
9 Closed = No ODU alarm Relay
22 Cable alarm common Cable Alarm
10 Open = No Cable alarm
23 Closed = No Cable alarm Relay
11 Input Alarm 1, active low
24 Input Alarm 2, active low
12 Input Alarm 3, active low
25 Input Alarm 4, active low
13 Ground

Figure A-7: Connection through the Relay/Alarms Port (PU)

CONNECTOR PIN-
OUTS
Pin Description
1 Ground
14 No Connection
2 No Connection
15 No Connection
3 No Connection
16 No Connection
4 No Connection
17 No Connection
5 SUM alarm common Sum Alarm
18 Open = No SUM alarm
6 Closed = No SUM alarm Relay
19 PU alarm common PU Alarm
7 Open = No PU alarm
Relay
20 Closed = No PU alarm
8 ODU alarm common ODU Alarm
21 Open = No ODU alarm
9 Closed = No ODU alarm Relay
22 Cable alarm common Cable Alarm
10 Open = No Cable alarm
23 Closed = No Cable alarm Relay
11 Input Alarm 5, active low
24 Input Alarm 6, active low
12 Input Alarm 7, active low
25 Input Alarm 8, active low
13 Ground

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


A-4 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS

Figure A-8: Connection for Balanced Tributaries 1-8:


50-Pin Female Amphenol Connector

Description Pin Pin Description

No Connection 1 26 No Connection
Ground 2 27 Ground
Out_ring8 3 28 Out_tip8
In_ring8 4 29 In_tip8
Ground 5 30 Ground
Out_ring7 6 31 Out_tip7
In_ring7 7 32 In_tip7
Ground 8 33 Ground
Out_ring6 9 34 Out_tip6
In_ring6 10 35 In_tip6
Ground 11 36 Ground
Out_ring5 12 37 Out_tip5
In_ring5 13 38 In_tip5
Ground 14 39 Ground
Out_ring4 15 40 Out_tip4
In_ring4 16 41 In_tip4
Ground 17 42 Ground
Out_ring3 18 43 Out_tip3
In_ring3 19 44 In_tip3
Ground 20 45 Ground
Out_ring2 21 46 Out_tip2
In_ring2 22 47 In_tip2
Ground 23 48 Ground
Out_ring1 24 49 Out_tip1
In_ring1 25 50 In_tip1

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


SPU Front Panel Ports and Connections A-5

Figure A-9: Connection for Balanced Tributaries 9-16:


50-Pin Female Amphenol Connector

Description Pin Pin Description

No Connection 1 26 No Connection
Ground 2 27 Ground
Out_ring16 3 28 Out_tip16
In_ring16 4 29 In_tip16
Ground 5 30 Ground
Out_ring15 6 31 Out_tip15
In_ring15 7 32 In_tip15
Ground 8 33 Ground
Out_ring14 9 34 Out_tip14
In_ring14 10 35 In_tip14
Ground 11 36 Ground
Out_ring13 12 37 Out_tip13
In_ring13 13 38 In_tip13
Ground 14 39 Ground
Out_ring12 15 40 Out_tip12

CONNECTOR PIN-
In_ring12 16 41 In_tip12
Ground 17 42 Ground
Out_ring11 18 43 Out_tip11

OUTS
In_ring11 19 44 In_tip11
Ground 20 45 Ground
Out_ring10 21 46 Out_tip10
In_ring10 22 47 In_tip10
Ground 23 48 Ground
Out_ring9 24 49 Out_tip9
In_ring9 25 50 In_tip9

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


A-6 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS

Figure A-10: Connection for Unbalanced Tributaries 1-8:


50-Pin Female Amphenol Connector

Description Pin Pin Description

No Connection 1 26 No Connection
Ground 2 27 Ground
Ground 3 28 Tributary 8 Out
Ground 4 29 Tributary 8 In
Ground 5 30 Ground
Ground 6 31 Tributary 7 Out
Ground 7 32 Tributary 7 In
Ground 8 33 Ground
Ground 9 34 Tributary 6 Out
Ground 10 35 Tributary 6 In
Ground 11 36 Ground
Ground 12 37 Tributary 5 Out
Ground 13 38 Tributary 5in
Ground 14 39 Ground
Ground 15 40 Tributary 4 Out
Ground 16 41 Tributary 4 In
Ground 17 42 Ground
Ground 18 43 Tributary 3 Out
Ground 19 44 Tributary 3 In
Ground 20 45 Ground
Ground 21 46 Tributary 2 Out
Ground 22 47 Tributary 2 In
Ground 23 48 Ground
Ground 24 49 Tributary 1 Out
Ground 25 50 Tributary 1 In

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


SPU Front Panel Ports and Connections A-7

Figure A-11: Connection for Unbalanced Tributaries 9-16:


50-Pin Female Amphenol Connector

Description Pin Pin Description

No Connection 1 26 No Connection
Ground 2 27 Ground
Ground 3 28 Tributary 16 Out
Ground 4 29 Tributary 16 In
Ground 5 30 Ground
Ground 6 31 Tributary 15 Out
Ground 7 32 Tributary 15 In
Ground 8 33 Ground
Ground 9 34 Tributary 14Out
Ground 10 35 Tributary 14 In
Ground 11 36 Ground
Ground 12 37 Tributary 13 Out
Ground 13 38 Tributary 13 in
Ground 14 39 Ground
Ground 15 40 Tributary 12 Out

CONNECTOR PIN-
Ground 16 41 Tributary 12 In
Ground 17 42 Ground

OUTS
Ground 18 43 Tributary 11 Out
Ground 19 44 Tributary 11 In
Ground 20 45 Ground
Ground 21 46 Tributary 10 out
Ground 22 47 Tributary 10 In
Ground 23 48 Ground
Ground 24 49 Tributary 9 Out
Ground 25 50 Tributary 9 In

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


A-8 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS

Figure A-12: 4-Wire Connector on Orderwire Cable: RJ--45

1 8

Table A-1: Pin-out for 4-Wire Orderwire Connector

Pin Description
1 Not Connected
2 Not Connected
Analog input to the positive
3
terminal
Analog output from the
4
positive terminal
Analog output from the
5
negative terminal
Analog input to the negative
6
terminal
7 Not Connected
8 Not Connected

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


B
A P P E N D I X

MENU TREE, (FOR SW 9.6.5)


The following figures show the menu tree a hand-held terminal or a VT-100
terminal.
Figure B-1: Main Menu

NE ADDRESS NE address selection screen — see ’The NE Address’


on page 4-29
ALARM See figure B-3
STATUS See figure B-4
CONTROL See figure B-5
PERFORMANCE See figure B-6
CONFIGURATION See figure B-7
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION See figure B-11

(FOR SW 9.6.5)
SHUTDOWN See figure B-12

MENU TREE,

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


B-2 MENU TREE, (FOR SW 9.6.5)

Figure B-2: Some Alternate Displays

The displays below are not on the menu tree, but appear under certain
circumstances, replacing the current display from the menu tree.
Appears when a modify instruction cannot
CAN’T MODIFY be carried out.

CANNOT BE APPLIED FROM Appears when a control instruction cannot


A REMOTE SITE be carried out from a remote site.

CANNOT BE MODIFIED Appears when a configuration value cannot


FROM A REMOTE SITE be modified out from a remote site.

Appears when a control instruction cannot


CONTROL ABORTED be carried out.

Appears when all items of a menu are


NOT INSTALLED unequipped.

Appears if the software in the ODU is


S/W CORRUPTED
corrupted.

Appears for 2 s when a configuration value is


INVALID VALUE rejected. The actual configuration value is
not modified.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


B-3

Figure B-3: The Alarm Branch


MAIN MENU IDU ALARM
NE ADDRESS SPU ALARM SPU ALARM
ALARM PU ALARM
MODEM PARAM MISSING TRANSMIT ALARM
STATUS RECEIVE ALARM
CONTROL FPGA LOAD MISSING
SPU/PU MISMATCH NO ALARMS
PERFORMANCE
CONFIGURATION SPU GENERAL FAILURE
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION SPU POWER ALARM
SHUTDOWN PU GENERAL FAILURE PU ALARM
PU ABSENT TRANSMIT ALARM
NO ALARMS RECEIVE ALARM
NO ALARMS
ALARM
IDU ALARM ODU ALARM
ODU ALARM
CABLE ALARM ODU ALARM A ODU ALARM A
RX TRAFFIC ALARM ODU ALARM B
TRIBUTARY ALARM ODU PARAM MSSING TRANSMIT ALARM
REMOTE ALARM ODU MISMATCH RECEIVE ALARM
SOFTWARE ALARM ODU SOFT NOT FOUND EEPROM ALARM
EXTERNAL ALARM NO ALARMS SOFTWARE CORRUPTED
CONTROL ACTIVATED DOWNLOAD FAILED
HPA EEPROM ALARM
CABLE ALARM HPA ALARM
NO ALARMS
CABLE A ALARM
CABLE B ALARM
PROT CABLE ALARM
NO ALARMS ODU ALARM B
NOTE: THE ITEMS IN THIS
BRANCH VARY TRANSMIT ALARM
DEPENDING IF THE ITEM RECEIVE ALARM
IS IN ALARM OR NOT.
RX TRAFFIC ALARM EEPROM ALARM
BER ALARM SOFTWARE CORRUPTED
SYNC LOSS DOWNLOAD FAILED
RSL LOW HPA EEPROM ALARM
NO ALARMS HPA ALARM
NO ALARMS

TRIBUTARY ALARM
TRIBUTARY 1 ALARM1 TRIBUTARY n ALARM
TRIBUTARY 2 ALARM
INPUT LOSS
CODE ERROR
AIS INPUT
TRIBUTARY n ALARM AIS RECEIVED
NOTES: TRANSMIT OFF2
NO ALARMS
1. For all SPUs except T3 RECEIVE OOF2

(FOR SW 9.6.5)
OR NO ALARMS
2. For T3 only.

MENU TREE,
TRIBUTARY T3 ALARM

REMOTE ALARM ODU A ALARM


REMOTE SYNC LOSS S/W INCOMPATIBLE
REMOTE COMM FAIL FREQUENCY ERROR
LINK ID VIOLATION AUTOCONFIG PA MUTE
NO ALARMS NO ALARMS
OR
ODU DOWNLOADING
SOFTWARE ALARM XXX%
ODU A ALARM
COMM IDU TO ODU A
COMM ODU A TO IDU
ODU B ALARM
COMM IDU TO ODU B
COMM ODU B TO IDU
NO ALARMS ODU B ALARM
S/W INCOMPATIBLE
FREQUENCY ERROR
EXTERNAL ALARM AUTOCONFIG PA MUTE
NO ALARMS
EXT ALARM 1
OR
EXT ALARM 8 ODU DOWNLOADING
NO ALARMS XXX%

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


B-4 MENU TREE, (FOR SW 9.6.5)

Figure B-4: The Status Branch


MAIN MENU EQUIPMENT ONLINE
NE ADDRESS TX A1 ONLINE / OFFLINE
ALARM TX B1 ONLINE / OFFLINE
STATUS RCVR A ONLINE / OFFLINE
CONTROL RCVR B ONLINE / OFFLINE
PERFORMANCE
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CONTROL STATUS
THIS MENU IS A REFLECTION OF
THE CONTROL MENU SHOWN IN SPU
FIGURE B-5. IT ONLY DISPLAYS PK VER XXXXXXXXXXX
STATUS THE PARAMETERS WITHOUT ALT PK XXXXXXXXXXX
EQUIPMENT ONLINE ALLOWING FOR MODIFYING S/W VER XXXXXXXXXXX
CONTROL STATUS THEIR VALUES. ALT S/W XXXXXXXXXXX
SYSTEM STATUS BOOT VER XXXXXXXXXX
INVENTORY MODEM XXXXXXXXXXX
CONFIG STATUS SYSTEM STATUS ALT MDM XXXXXXXXXXX
IP ROUTING STATUS RSL A XXXdBm ODU-DF XXXXXXXXXXX
RSL B XXXdBm ALT ODU XXXXXXXXXXX
Pout A XXXdBm / FPGA XXXXXXXXXXX
MANUAL MUTED / ALT PGA XXXXXXXXXXX
SYSTEM MUTED PN XXX-XXXXXX-XXX
THE ITEMS IN THIS BRANCH Pout B XXXdBm / SN XXXXXXXX
VARY DEPENDING ON THE MANUAL MUTED / DATE XXXX-XX-XX
OPTIONS INSTALLED. SYSTEM MUTED
TEMP A XXX C / XXX F
TEMP B XXX C / XXX F
TX A XXXXXXXXkHz ODU A
TX B XXXXXXXXkHz S/W VER XXXX
RX A XXXXXXXXkHz BOOT VER XXXX
RX B XXXXXXXXkHz PN XXX-XXXXXX-XXX
TX MN A XXXXXXXXkHz SN XXXXXXXX
TX MN B XXXXXXXXkHz DATE XXXX-XX-XX
TX MX A XXXXXXXXkHz
TX MX B XXXXXXXXkHz
TX STEP XXXXkHz
RX MN A XXXXXXXXkHz
RX MN B XXXXXXXXkHz ODU B
RX MX A XXXXXXXXkHz S/W VER XXXX
RX MX B XXXXXXXXkHz BOOT VER XXXX
RX STEP XXXXkHz PN XXX-XXXXXX-XXX
CHANNEL A OK / DEGRADING SN XXXXXXXX
CHANNEL B OK / DEGRADING DATE XXXX-XX-XX
RSL STATUS A OK / LOW
RSL STATUS B OK / LOW
AUTOCONF A ON HOLD / DONE
AUTOCONF B ON HOLD / DONE
HPA A
PN XXX-XXXXXX-XXX
INVENTOR
INVENTORY SN XXXXXXXX
*Some items SPU DATE XXXX-XX-XX
ODU A
appear in the ODU B
CONFIG STATUS HPA A
HPA B HPA B
menu, but not when FREQ PLAN PN XXX-XXXXXX-XXX
the CONFIG menu is SN XXXXXXXX
DATE XXXX-XX-XX
accessed from the
MAIN menu. The FREQ PLAN
CONFIG menu PN XXX-XXXXXX-XXX
VER XXXXXXXXXXX
displays parameters
that can be CONFIG STATUS
TO THE CONFIGURATION MENU. PING
configured SEE FIGURE B-7.*
TO: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy

• CLR • • PING •
NOTES: IP ROUTING STATUS
1. Status displayed for PING
both transceivers in ROUTING TABLE ROUTING TABLE
FD and FD/SD
D: ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd/mm
protection schemes.
R: rrr.rrr.rrr.rrr
I: i i i i i i i P:ppppppp
• NEXT • • PREV •

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


B-5

Figure B-5: The Control Branch

MAIN MENU IDU


NE ADDRESS FORCE TX A SET / CLR
ALARM FORCE TX B SET / CLR
STATUS FORCE RCVR A SET / CLR
CONTROL FORCE RCVR B SET / CLR
PERFORMANCE TRIB LOOPBACK TRIB LOOPBACK
CONFIGURATION MUX - DEMUX LPBK SET / CLR
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION TRIB LPBK 1 SET / CLR
TRIB LPBK 2 SET / CLR

TRIB LPBK n SET / CLR


OR

CONTROL TRIB LPBK T3 SET / CLR


IDU
ODU ODU
MANUAL MUTE TXA SET / CLR
MANUAL MUTE TXB SET / CLR
CW TONE A SET / CLR
CW TONE B SET / CLR

Figure B-6: The Performance Branch

MAIN MENU G.826


NE ADDRESS ET XXd XXh XX:XX
ALARM EFS XXXXXXX

(FOR SW 9.6.5)
STATUS ES XXXXXXX
CONTROL SES XXXXXXX

MENU TREE,
PERFORMANCE UNAV XXXXXXX
CONFIGURATION BBE XXXXXXXXXX
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EFSR XX.XXXXX%
ESR XX.XXXXX%
SESR XX.XXXXX%
UNAVR XX.XXXXX%
BBER XX.XXXXX%

• RST • • • EXIT

PERFORMANCE
G.826
BER BER
ET XXd XXh XX:XX
• • • • EXIT BER X.X E-XX
SYNC LOSS
SYNC LOSS OCCURRED

• • • • EXIT

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


B-6 MENU TREE, (FOR SW 9.6.5)

Figure B-7: The Configuration Branch


MAIN MENU
NE ADDRESS
ALARM
STATUS
CONTROL
PERFORMANCE
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CONFIGURATION
IDU
ODU A / B

NET_COMM
REMOTE ENABLE / DISABLE
IDU RPTR IN ENABLE / DISABLE
RPTR OUT ENABLE / DISABLE
NE ADDRESS 1-999 LAN ENABLE / DISABLE
NET_COMM
INTERNET See figure B-8
PCMCIA PCMCIA
DATA PORT
CONTROL PASSWORD 0000-9999 DUAL SERIAL PORT See figure B-9
CONFIG PASSWORD 0000-9999 SERVICE CHANNEL See figure B-10
MASTER PASSWORD 0000-9999
MODULATION QPSK / 16QAM
CAPACITY 2x2Mb /4x2Mb / 8x2Mb / DATA PORT
16x2Mb / CHARACTER LENGTH 5 BITS / 6 BITS
2T1/ 4T1 / 8T1 /16T1 / 7 BITS / 8 BITS
PROTECTION UNPR / MHSB / SPEED 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600
MHSB/SD / FD / FD/SD / 19200 / 38400
TRIBUTARY PARITY CHECK EVEN / ODD / NONE
TRIBUTARY CODE AMI / HDB3 / CIRCUIT TYPE 1:1 / 1:N
B8ZS / B3ZS PEER NE_ADDRESS 1-999
T1 TRIBUTARY CODES
TRIB T3 MODE FRAMED / UNFRAMED
TRIBUTARY EQUAL TRIBUTARY
LINK ID 00-99
FEC CORRECTION DISABLE / ENABLE TRIBUTARY 1 DISABLE / ENABLE
AIS THRESHOLD DISABLE / 1E-3 TRIBUTARY 2 DISABLE / ENABLE
BER THRESHOLD1E-3 / 1E-4 / 1E-5 / 1E-6
RSL LOW SEVERITY ALARM / STATUS
FREQ PROG MODE NO PLAN / BY PLAN TRIBUTARY n DISABLE / ENABLE
FREQ PLAN STATUS NO PLAN / BY PLAN
LICENSE ID A XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX T1 TRIBUTARY CODES
LICENSE ID B XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TRIBUTARY T1-1 AMI / B8ZS
TRIBUTARY T1-2 AMI / B8ZS

TRIBUTARY T1-16 AMI / B8ZS


ODU A / B
TX ATTEN (dB) XX TRIBUTARY EQUAL
TX FREQ SET (kHz) XXXXXXX TRIB... 1 EQUAL 0-133’ / 133-266’
RX FREQ SET (kHz) XXXXXXX / 266-399’ / 399-533’
/ 533-655’
TRIB... 2 EQUAL 0-133’ / 133-266’
/ 266-399’ / 399-533’
/ 533-655’
TRIB... 3 EQUAL 0-133’ / 133-266’
/ 266-399’ / 399-533’
/ 533-655’
TRIB... n EQUAL 0-133’ / 133-266’
/ 266-399’ / 399-533’
/ 533-655’

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


B-7

Figure B-8: Interfaces


INTERNET
INTERFACES INTERFACES
STATIC ROUTES
SNMP NETCOMM IP ADR/MSK
FTP 10BT/NMS ETHERNET
FORWARDING HOST / ROUTER

NETCOMM IP ADR/MSK
ITEM NAME
A: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/mm
N: yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy/nn

•CLR • / •EXIT

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx = Actual IP Address


mm = Actual Mask
y yy.yyy.yyy.yyy = New IP Address
yyy value = 0-255*
nn = New Mask, nn value = 0-30*

*Values outside this range are rejected

10BT/NMS ETHERNET
IP ADDRESS/MASK xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/mm
DHCP PEER IP ADDR xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

STATIC ROUTES
DEFAULT ROUTER xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
STATIC RTE1 DESTxxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/mm
STATIC RTE1 ROUTER xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

STATIC RTE8 DESTxxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/mm


STATIC RTE8 ROUTER xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

(FOR SW 9.6.5)
MENU TREE,
SNMP
NOTIFIED NMS
AUTHORIZED NMS
RD ONLY COMMUNITY xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
RW COMMUNITY xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
WRITE PERMISSION ENABLE / DISABLE

NOTIFIED NMS
NOTIFIED NMS n xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
NTFD NMS n STATUS ENABLE / DISABLE

AUTHORIZED NMS
AUTHORIZED NMS n xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
NTFD NMS n STATUS ENABLE / DISABLE

FTP
FTP USER NAME xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
FTP PASSWORD xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


B-8 MENU TREE, (FOR SW 9.6.5)

Figure B-9: Dual Serial Port (PCMCIA) Display

DUAL SERIAL PORT


PORT 1-A PROTOCOL RS-232 / COMPUTER /
RTU 232 / DISABLED
PORT 1-A SPEED 1200 / 2400 / 4800
9600 / 19200 / 38400
PORT 2-A PROTOCOL RS-232 / COMPUTER /
RTU 232 / DISABLED
PORT 2-B SPEED 1200 / 2400 / 4800
9600 / 19200 / 38400

Figure B-10: Service Channel Menu

SERVICE CHANNEL
4W VF IN/OUT LEVEL -16/7dBm / 0/0 dBm
4-WIRES INTERFACE ENABLED / DISABLED

Figure B-11: System Description Menu

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
...
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

• • • • EXIT

Figure B-12: The Shutdown Menu

SHUTDOWN
SHUTDOWN REASONSW UPGR / FW UPGR / RESET
SHUTDOWN DELAY xxxxxx

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


C
A P P E N D I X

MENU ITEM GLOSSARY


(FOR SW V9.6.5)
The following menu item glossary lists the items in the resident software’s
menus. The resident software is the software that you access with a hand held
terminal.

4W VF IN/OUT LEVEL [-16/7 dBm / 0/0 dBm]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / PCMCIA /
SERVICE CHANNEL / 4W VF IN/OUT LEVEL
Explanation: Allows for setting the input/output levels of the service
channel (orderwire).

4-WIRES INTERFACE [ENABLED / DISABLED]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / PCMCIA /
SERVICE CHANNEL / 4-WIRES INTERFACE

MENU ITEM GLOSSARY


(FOR SW V9.6.5)
Explanation: Enables or disables the 4-wire interface support.

10BT/NMS ETHERNET
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET /
INTERFACES / 10BT/NMS ETHERNET
Explanation: Leads to the 10BASE-T Ethernet interface configuration
menu.

AIS INPUT
Menu path: ALARM / TRIBUTARY ALARM / TRIBUTARY n ALARM /
AIS INPUT
Explanation: Appears when an AIS signal is detected at the tributary n
input.
Action: Restore normal traffic to the SPU tributary input.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


C-2 MENU ITEM GLOSSARY (FOR SW V9.6.5)

AIS RECEIVED
Menu path: ALARM / TRIBUTARY ALARM / TRIBUTARY n ALARM /
AIS RECEIVED
Explanation: Appears when an AIS signal is detected at the tributary n
output.
Action: The remote coordinating site is transmitting an AIS signal.
This signal indicates that there is a problem with the
equipment at an upstream site. Check the operation of the
equipment at the remote coordinating site.

AIS THRESHOLD [DISABLE / 1E-3]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / AIS THRESHOLD
Explanation: Select the BER in the SPU that will activate AIS.

ALARM
Menu path: ALARM
Explanation: Leads to submenus that allow the operator to view the alarm
information.

ALT MDM [XXXXXXXXXXX]


Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / SPU / ALT MDM
Explanation: Displays the alternate modem parameter file version.

ALT ODU [XXXXXXXXXXX]


Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / SPU / ALT ODU
Explanation: Displays the alternate ODU description file version.

ALT PK VER [XXXXXXXXXXX]


Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / SPU / ALT PK VER
Explanation: Displays the alternate software package number as obtained
from the release number of the “manifest.alt” file.

ALT PGA [XXXXXXXXXXX]


Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / SPU / ALT PGA
Explanation: Displays the alternate FPGA firmware file version.

ALT S/W [XXXXXXXXXXX]


Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / SPU / ALT S/W
Explanation: Indicates the version number of the software currently in
SPU’s alternate software memory bank.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


C-3

AUTHORIZED NMS
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET / SNMP /
NOTIFIED NMS
Explanation: Leads to a sub-menu used to authorized SNMP access to
particular management stations.

AUTHORIZED NMS n[XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET / SNMP /
NOTIFIED NMS / NOTIFIED NMS n
Explanation: Enter the IP address of one of 10 management stations that
may be authorized to access the SNMP MIB. The display has
10 similar items, one for each of these management stations.
To disable this feature enter “0.0.0.0” as at least one of the IP
addresses. If the feature is enabled, use the loopback address
(127.0.0.1) in unused positions. Whether or not authorized
management stations can actually access the MIB depends on
whether access has been enabled or not by the corresponding
AUTH NMS n STATUS item.

AUTH NMS n STATUS [ENABLE / DISABLE]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET / SNMP /
NOTIFIED NMS / NTFD NMS n STATUS
Explanation: Enable or disable MIB access by the management station at
the nth address assigned by the AUTH NMS n menu item.
Explanation:

AUTOCONF A (B) [ON HOLD / DONE]


Menu path: STATUS / SYSTEM STATUS / AUTOCONF A (B)

MENU ITEM GLOSSARY


(FOR SW V9.6.5)
Explanation: Displays after replacing an SPU or PU. Indicates the
configuration status of the respective channel.

AUTOCONFIG PA MUTE
Menu path: ALARM / SOFTWARE ALARM / ODU A (B) ALARM /
AUTOCONFIG PA MUTE
Explanation: Occurs normally when an ODU is cold booted, identifying a
request to mute the respective ODU’s amplifier. The SPU is
checking the ODU configuration for sparing.
Action: Check the ODU configuration parameters.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


C-4 MENU ITEM GLOSSARY (FOR SW V9.6.5)

BBE [XXXXXXXXXX]
Menu path: PERFORMANCE / G.826 / BBE
Explanation: Identifies a Background Block Error, where the block in error
is not occurring as part of a severe error second in the available
period.

BBER [XX.XXXXX%]
Menu path: PERFORMANCE / G.826 / BBER
Explanation: Displays the ratio of background block errors is the ratio of
BBE to total blocks in available time during a fixed interval.
BER
Menu path: PERFORMANCE / BER
Explanation: Leads to a submenu giving performance parameters.

BER [X.X E-XX]


Menu path: PERFORMANCE / BER / BER
Explanation: Displays the bit error rate of the corrected signal (after the
FEC), calculated for available time from the last time the RST
(reset) option in the menu was selected. Available time does
not include synch loss time.

BER ALARM
Menu path: ALARM / RX TRAFFIC ALARM / BER ALARM
Explanation: Appears when BER on the receive path becomes worse than
the threshold set by the CONFIGURATION / IDU /
BER THRESHOLD menu item.
Action: Check for a low receive signal level or interference from
another transmitter.

BER THRESHOLD [1E-3 / 1E-4 / 1E-5 / 1E-6]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / BER THRESHOLD
Explanation: Select the BER level in the SPU that will activate a BER alarm.

BOOT VER [XXXX]


Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / ODU A (B) / BOOT VER
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / SPU / BOOT VER
Explanation: Indicates the issue number of the bootstrap software in the
SPU or in the ODU’s radio control module.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


C-5

CABLE ALARM
Menu path: ALARM / CABLE ALARM
Explanation: Leads to submenus.

CABLE A (B) ALARM


Menu path: ALARM / CABLE ALARM / CABLE A (B) ALARM
Explanation: Indicates that there is a problem (short or open) with the
coaxial cable between the ODU and SPU.
Action: Check the cable between the SPU and the ODU.

CAPACITY [2X2 MB / 4X2 MB / 8X2 MB / 16X2 MB / 2T1 / 4T1 / 8T1 /


16T1 / T3]
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / CAPACITY
Explanation: Sets the tributary capacity of the microwave radio. Please note
that traffic is lost for 20 seconds when a capacity change is
made.

CHANNEL A (B) [OK / DEGRADING]


Menu path: STATUS / SYSTEM STATUS / CHANNEL A (B)
Explanation: “DEGRADING” indicates the FEC is correcting many errors.
Action: Isolate and fix the problem.

CHARACTER LENGTH [7 BITS / 8 BITS]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / DATA PORT /
CHARACTER LENGTH
Explanation: Defines the characters length handled through the data port as
a configuration point. The default value of this configuration

MENU ITEM GLOSSARY


(FOR SW V9.6.5)
point is 8 bits per character.

CIRCUIT TYPE [1:1 / 1:N]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / DATA PORT / CIRCUIT TYPE
Explanation: Defines the virtual circuit types for the data channel; 1:1 as
point-to-point and 1:N as point-to-multipoint. The default
value is set as 1:N.

CODE ERROR
Menu path: ALARM / TRIBUTARY ALARM / TRIBUTARY n ALARM /
CODE ERROR
Explanation: Appears when a tributary coding error is detected at the
tributary n input of the SPU.
Action: Check that the correct input code type is selected for the
CONFIGURATION / IDU / TRIBUTARY CODE menu item.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


C-6 MENU ITEM GLOSSARY (FOR SW V9.6.5)

COMM IDU TO ODU A (B)


Menu path: ALARM / SOFTWARE ALARM / COMM IDU TO ODU A
(B)
Explanation: Appears when the telemetry signal from the SPU/PU to the
ODU fails.
Action: Check the coaxial cable and connections between the SPU/PU
and ODU. Restore signal continuity.

COMM ODU A (B) TO IDU


Menu path: ALARM / SOFTWARE ALARM / COMM ODU A TO IDU
Explanation: Appears when the telemetry signal from the ODU to the SPU
fails.
Action: Check the coaxial cable and connections between the SPU/PU
and ODU. Restore signal continuity.

CONFIG PASSWORD [XXXX]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / CONFIG PASSWORD
Explanation: This sets the password for configuration privileges.

CONFIG STATUS
Menu path: STATUS / CONFIG STATUS
Explanation: Leads to a set of submenus that are a non-configurable version
of the configuration menu.

CONFIGURATION
Menu path: CONFIGURATION
Explanation: Leads to submenus that allow the operator to modify the
configuration data.

CONTROL
Menu path: CONTROL
Explanation: Leads to submenus that allow the operator to set the control
functions.

CONTROL ACTIVATED
Menu path: ALARM / CONTROL ACTIVATED
Explanation: This alarm warns that a control has been set (in the control
menu).
Action: To clear the alarm, clear the control that was set in the control
menu.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


C-7

CONTROL PASSWORD [XXXX]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / CONTROL PASSWORD
Explanation: This sets the password for control privileges.

CONTROL STATUS
Menu path: STATUS / CONTROL STATUS
Explanation: Leads to a a read-only version of the control menus.

CW TONE A(B) [SET / CLR]


Menu path: CONTROL / ODU / CW TONE A(B)
Menu path: STATUS / CONTROL STATUS / ODU / CW TONE A(B)
Explanation: In the control menu, select SET to replace the transmit signal
with a CW signal at the transmit frequency. When a
transmitter is set to CW, the output of the radio is the
unmodulated transmit frequency. This feature is useful for
verifying the transmit frequency with a frequency counter. In
the status menu this item is read-only.

DATA PORT
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / DATA PORT
Explanation: Leads to a menu for defining parameter settings for the DATA
port.

DATE [XXXX-XX-XX]
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / SPU / DATE
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / ODU A(B) / DATE
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / HPA A(B) / DATE

MENU ITEM GLOSSARY


(FOR SW V9.6.5)
Explanation: Gives the software’s manufacturing date for the given
component.

DEFAULT ROUTER [XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET /
STATIC ROUTES / DEFAULT ROUTER
Explanation: This sets the IP address of the MicroStar’s default router.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


C-8 MENU ITEM GLOSSARY (FOR SW V9.6.5)

DHCP PEER IP ADDR [XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET /
INTERFACES / ETHERNET / DHCP PEER IP ADDR
Explanation: This sets the IP address that the MicroStar® will lease to a PC
for the duration of the connection. The PC must be configured
to obtain this address though the DHCP server built in the
MicroStar® radio. For more detailed information. Refer to The
DHCP Server on page D-8.

DOWNLOAD FAILED
Menu path: ALARM / ODU ALARM / ODU ALARM A(B) / DOWNLOAD
FAILED
Explanation: Appears if the autodownload function tried but could not
download to the ODU.
Action: Try to download again. Refer to Automatic Inter-Unit
Software Download on page 4-31.

DUAL SERIAL PORT


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / PCMCIA / DUAL SERIAL
PORT
Explanation: Leads to the PCMCIA’s dual serial port menu for setting the
protocol and speed parameters applicable to that port. For
more detailed information. Refer to figure B-9.

EEPROM ALARM
Menu path: ALARM / ODU ALARM / ODU ALARM A(B) / EEPROM
ALARM
Explanation: This alarm indicates that there is a problem with the boot
EEPROM in the named unit or module.
Action: Replace the faulty unit or module.

EQUIPMENT ON LINE
Menu path: STATUS / EQUIPMENT ONLINE
Explanation: Indicates which units are currently selected to pass traffic.

EFS [XXXXXXX]
Menu path: PERFORMANCE / G.826 / EFS
Explanation: Displays number of error free seconds, calculated from the
time the RST (reset) option was last selected in any of the
G.826 branch menus. Note: Error free seconds are not
described in G.826.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


C-9

ES [XXXXXXX]
Menu path: PERFORMANCE / G.826 / ES
Explanation: Displays the number of errored seconds, as defined in ITU-T
Recommendation G.826, since the RST (reset) option was last
selected in any of the G.826 branch menus.

EFSR [XX.XXXXX%]
Menu path: PERFORMANCE / G.826 / EFSR
Explanation: Displays ratio of error free seconds to the time elapsed since
the RST (reset) option was last selected in any of the G.826
branch menus. Note: The EFSR is not described in G.826.

ESR [XX.XXXXX]
Menu path: PERFORMANCE / G.826 / ESR
Explanation: Displays the errored second ratio, as defined in ITU-T
Recommendation G.826, calculated from the time the RST
(reset) option was last selected in any of the G.826 branch
menus.

ET [XXD XXH XX.XX]


Menu path: PERFORMANCE / G.826 / ET
Explanation: Displays the time elapsed since the BER calculator was last
reset (by the RST option in any of the menus in the BER
branch of the menu tree).

EXTERNAL ALARM
Menu path: ALARM / EXTERNAL ALARM

MENU ITEM GLOSSARY


Explanation: Leads to submenu.

(FOR SW V9.6.5)
EXTERNAL ALARM n
Menu path: ALARM / EXTERNAL ALARM / EXT ALARM n
Explanation: Appears when there is a CMOS low on the corresponding
external alarm input.

FEC CORRECTION [DISABLE / ENABLE]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / FEC CORRECTION
Explanation: Disables the forward error correction function for testing
purposes.

FORCE RCVR A (B) [SET / CLR]


Menu path: CONTROL / IDU / FORCE RCVR A(B)
Explanation: Forces traffic through the specified receiver.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


C-10 MENU ITEM GLOSSARY (FOR SW V9.6.5)

FORCE TX A(B) [SET / CLR]


Menu path: CONTROL / IDU / FORCE TX A(B)
Explanation: Forces traffic through the specified transmitter.

In a MicroStar® protected system, reverting from


a forced transmit signal condition to the initial
default condition is not automatic. That is, after
removing a forced transmit on a given channel,
you still need to restore manually your original
settings. Automatic switching between channels
happen only in the case of a hardware failure.

FORWARDING [HOST / ROUTER]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET / FORWARDING
Explanation: Allows IP packet forwarding from one interface to another
(router), or not (host).

FPGA [XXXXXXXXXXX]
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / SPU / FPGA
Explanation: Displays the firmware file version of the FPGA.

FPGA LOAD MISSING


Menu path: ALARM / IDU ALARM / FPGA LOAD MISSING
Explanation: This alarm indicates that the FPGA firmware file was not
found.
Action: Load the latest available version of the FPGA firmware file.

FREQ PLAN
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / FREQ PLAN
Explanation: Leads to a submenu displaying the part number and option
version of the selected frequency plan.

FREQ PROG MODE [NO PLAN / BY PLAN]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / FREQ PROG MODE
Explanation: Allows for selecting the frequency programming mode, by plan
or no plan.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


C-11

FREQ PROG STATUS [NO PLAN / BY PLAN]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / FREQ PROG STATUS
Explanation: Displays only the status of the frequency programming mode
selected, by plan or no plan.

FREQUENCY ERROR
Menu path: ALARM / SOFTWARE ALARM /
ODU A (B) ALARM / FREQUENCY ERROR
Explanation: This alarm indicates that the chosen frequency is outside of the
option range of the ODU.
Action: Program a valid frequency.

FTP
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET / FTP
Explanation: Leads to a submenu for configuring the FTP parameters.

FTP PASSWORD [xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET / FTP /
FTP PASSWORD
Explanation: Allows the operator to enter a password for FTP access
authentication. The password must be a string of up to 16
alphanumeric characters.

FTP USER NAME [xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET / FTP /
FTP USER NAME
Explanation: Allows the operator to enter a user name for FTP access

MENU ITEM GLOSSARY


authentication. The user name must be a string of up to 16

(FOR SW V9.6.5)
alphanumeric characters. The default value of this string is
“null string”

G.826
Menu path: PERFORMANCE / G.826
Explanation: Leads to submenus giving performance data based on the ITU-
T G.826 standard.

HPA A (B)
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / HPA A (B)
Explanation: Leads to sub-menus giving status information on the HPAs for
radios so equipped.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


C-12 MENU ITEM GLOSSARY (FOR SW V9.6.5)

HPA ALARM
Menu path: ALARM / ODU ALARM A(B) / HPA ALARM
Explanation: This alarm indicates that there is a problem with the output of
the high power amplifier (HPA).
Action: Replace the HPA.

HPA EEPROM ALARM


Menu path: ALARM / ODU ALARM A(B) / HPA EEPROM ALARM
Explanation: This alarm indicates that there is a problem with the boot
EEPROM in the HPA.
Action: Replace the HPA.

INTERFACES
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET / INTERFACES
Explanation: Leads to a submenu for setting IP addresses and masks for the
INTNET and Ethernet interfaces parameters.

INPUT LOSS
Menu path: ALARM / TRIBUTARY ALARM / TRIBUTARY n ALARM /
INPUT LOSS
Explanation: Appears when the tributary n signal is lost at the input to the
SPU’s multiplexer.
Action: Restore normal traffic to the SPU tributary input.

INTERNET
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET
Explanation: Leads to submenus for network management configuration.

INVENTORY
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY
Explanation: Leads to submenus that show the hardware and software
version numbers of the microwave radio.

IP ROUTING STATUS
Menu path: STATUS / IP ROUTING STATUS
Explanation: Displays the status of the Internet Protocol router.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


C-13

LAN [ENABLE / DISABLE]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / NET_COMM / LAN
Explanation: Allows the user to ENABLE / DISABLE the NetComm
protocol support on the 10BASE-T/NMS port for LAN
interconnection through a cross-connect cable (RJ-45). This
does not affect the IP support on the 10BASE-T/NMS LAN
port. The purpose of this configuration point is preventing the
NetComm protocol from being carried on the user’s LAN.

LICENSE ID A (B) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / LICENSE A (B)
Explanation: This IDU configuration point is a 16 characters string. It is
used to store the administratively allocated frequency License
ID of the RF link. This information is used for inventory
purpose only. Only one license ID is associated with each RFU.

LINK ID [00-99]
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / LINK ID
Explanation: The link ID is an identification number that corresponds to the
link ID number of the coordinating site. This prevents the
microwave radio from picking up stray signals from the wrong
site. Valid range is 00-99.

This configuration point can be set through SNMP and


the hand-held or VT-100 terminals. It is not available
through the WebCIT.

MENU ITEM GLOSSARY


(FOR SW V9.6.5)
LINK ID VIOLATION
Menu path: ALARM / REMOTE ALARM / LINK ID VIOLATION
Explanation: This alarm indicates that the link identification number of the
remote coordinating site microwave radio is set to a different
number than the one used at this site. This alarm may also
indicate that it is picking up the signal from the wrong
coordinating site. This alarm causes an AIS to be inserted into
the receive tributaries.
Action: Verify that the link ID number is the same as the coordinating
site. If the link ID number is good, align the ODU antenna to
the proper coordinating site.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


C-14 MENU ITEM GLOSSARY (FOR SW V9.6.5)

MANUAL MUTE TXA (B) [SET / CLR]


Menu path: CONTROL / ODU / MANUAL MUTE TXA (B)
Explanation: Mutes (turns off) the transmitter output, by manual
intervention of the user.

MASTER PASSWORD [0000-9999]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / MASTER PASSWORD
Explanation: Enter new master password.

MODEM [XXXXXXXXXXX]
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / SPU / MODEM
Explanation: Displays version of the current modem parameter file.

MODEM PARAM MISSING


Menu path: ALARM / IDU ALARM / MODEM PARAM MISSING
Explanation: Appears when the capacity/modulation have been changed or
are not supported. It also indicates that the modem
parameters file was not found or is of a wrong version.
Action: Enter the modulation type as well as capacity through the
number of allowed tributaries or, a software upgrade may be
required.

MODULATION [QPSK /16QAM]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / MODULATION
Explanation: Allows for setting the modulation type for the MicroStar®
radio.
Action: Set the modulation type, where applicable. Please note that
traffic is lost for 20 seconds when the modulation type is
changed.

MUX-DEMUX LPBK [SET / CLR]


Menu path: CONTROL / IDU / MUX - DEMUX LPBK
Explanation: This High level multiplexer to demultiplexer loopback can be
set/cleared locally or remotely by the operator. This control
times out after 10 minutes when it is applied from a remote site
or from any network management interface. Refer to
Tributary and Mux-to-Demux Loopback on page 4-30.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


C-15

NE ADDRESS [1-999]
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / NE ADDRESS
Explanation: Sets the network element (NE) address for the local site.
Action: Enter the network element address of the microwave radio
that is to be the subject of subsequent alarm display unit
operations. Refer to section The NE Address on page 4-29.

NET_COMM
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / NET_COMM
Explanation: Leads to a sub-menu for configuring the network’s Net_Comm
parameters.

NET_COMM IP ADR/MSK [XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX/mm]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET / INTERFACES /
NET_COMM IP ADR/MSK
Explanation: Sets the IP address that corresponds to this NE address, as
well as the mask for the local sub-net of MicroStar® radios.

NOTIFIED NMS
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET / SNMP /
NOTIFIED NMS
Explanation: Leads to a sub-menu used to authorized certain SNMP
management stations to receive traps.

NOTIFIED NMS n[XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET / SNMP /
NOTIFIED NMS / NOTIFIED NMS n

MENU ITEM GLOSSARY


Explanation: Enter the IP address of one of 10 management stations that

(FOR SW V9.6.5)
may be authorized to receive SNMP traps. The display has 10
similar items, one for each of these management stations.
Whether or not the management station actually receives
traps depends on whether access has been enabled or not by
the corresponding NTFD NMS n STATUS item.

NTFD NMS n STATUS [ENABLE / DISABLE]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET / SNMP /
NOTIFIED NMS / NTFD NMS n STATUS
Explanation: Enable or disable trap reception by the management station at
the nth address assigned by the NOTIFIED NMS n menu item.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


C-16 MENU ITEM GLOSSARY (FOR SW V9.6.5)

NO ALARMS
Menu path: ALARM / NO ALARMS
Explanation: The microwave radio alarm monitoring circuitry has not
registered any radio malfunction.
Action: None.

ODU
Menu path: STATUS / CONTROL STATUS / ODU
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / ODU A(B)
Menu path: CONTROL / ODU
Explanation: Leads to submenus showing the current status of the ODU.

ODU A(B)
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / ODU A(B)
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / ODU A(B)
Explanation: Leads to submenus.

ODU ALARM
Menu path: ALARM / ODU ALARM
Explanation: Leads to submenus that indicate the alarms of the ODU.

ODU-DF [XXXXXXXXXXX]
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / SPU / ODU-DF
Explanation: Displays version of the current ODU description file.

ODU DOWNLOADING [XXX%]


Menu path: ALARM / SOFTWARE ALARM / ODU n ALARM / ODU
DOWNLOADING
Explanation: This alarm indicates that the ODU is downloading software.
Some functions will not be available during this time.
Action: Wait for the download to complete.

ODU MISMATCH
Menu path: ALARM / ODU ALARM / ODU MISMATCH
Explanation: Indicates that the ODUs in a protected system are not
compatible.
Action: Install ODUs that have the same model number.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


C-17

ODU PARAM MISSING


Menu path: ALARM / ODU ALARM / ODU PARAM MISSING
Explanation: Indicates that an ODU-related parameter was not found.
Action: Upgrade software to the latest available version.

ODU SOFT NOT FOUND


Menu path: ALARM / ODU ALARM / ODU SOFT NOT FOUND
Explanation: Indicates that the ODU software load was not found.
Action: Upgrade software to the latest available version.

ONLINE RCVR A(B)


Menu path: STATUS / EQUIPMENT ONLINE / ONLINE RCVR A(B)
Explanation: Indicates which receiver is currently selected to pass traffic.

PARITY CHECK [EVEN / ODD / NONE]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / DATA PORT / PARITY CHECK
Explanation: Sets the parity check for each character transferred through
the data port. The default value for this configuration point is
NONE.

PCMCIA
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / PCMCIA
Explanation: Leads to a submenu for setting parameters on the PCMCIA
dual serial port.

PEER NE_ADDRESS [1-999]

MENU ITEM GLOSSARY


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / DATA PORT /

(FOR SW V9.6.5)
PEER NE_ADDRESS
Explanation: This is the NE address of the MicroStar® radio located at the
other end of a point-to-point virtual circuit for the data
channel. A data channel is then established in one direction
from the local MicroStar® radio to the MicroStar® radio
designated by this peer NE address.

PERFORMANCE
Menu path: PERFORMANCE
Explanation: Leads to submenus that allow the operator to monitor the
performance functions.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


C-18 MENU ITEM GLOSSARY (FOR SW V9.6.5)

PING [XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX]
Menu path: STATUS / IP ROUTING STATUS / PING
Explanation: A utility used to determine if a particular IP address can be
reached from the current location. A connection to a valid IP
address will display a response from the remote host.

PK VER [XXXXXXXXXXX]
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / SPU / PK VER
Explanation: Displays the software package number as obtained from the
release number of the “manifest.dat” file.

PN [XXX-XXXXXX-XXX]
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / SPU / PN
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / ODU A(B) / PN
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / HPA A(B) / PN
Explanation: Gives the part number of the specified module or unit.

POUT A (B) [MANUAL MUTED / SYSTEM MUTED]


Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / POUT A(B)
Explanation: Displays the power output status of the respective channel.

POUT A(B) [XX DBM]


Menu path: STATUS / SYSTEM STATUS / POUT
Explanation: Gives the ALC level in dBm.

PROTECTION [UNPR - MHSB - MHSB/SD - FD - FD/SD]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / PROTECTION
Explanation: Configures the radio for the following operations:
Unprotected, Monitored Hot Standby, Monitored Hot
Standby Space Diversity, Frequency Diversity, or Frequency
Diversity with Space Diversity.

PROT CABLE ALARM


Menu path: ALARM / CABLE ALARM / PROT CABLE ALARM
Explanation: In a protected system, indicates that the coaxial cable between
the PU and the ODU is faulty.
Action: Check and/or replace or connect the cable as required.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


C-19

PU ABSENT
Menu path: ALARM / IDU ALARM / PU ABSENT
Explanation: This alarm is raised when the PU is powered off or not
installed.

PU ALARM
Menu path: ALARM / IDU ALARM / PU ALARM
Explanation: Leads to submenus.

PU GENERAL FAILURE
Menu path: ALARM / IDU ALARM / PU ALARM /
PU GENERAL FAILURE
Explanation: Occurs when the FPGA on the PU cannot be loaded.
Action: Download latest version of software. If problem persists,
replace the PU.

RD ONLY COMMUNITY
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET / SNMP /
NOTIFIED NMS / RD ONLY COMMUNITY
Explanation: Enter the name of the SNMP read community if it is to be
different from the SNMP read write community. A community
name, ether this one or the R/W community name, must be
included in get requests to the SNMP MIB. The default is
“PRIVATE”-.

RECEIVE ALARM
Menu path: ALARM / SPU ALARM / SPU ALARM / RECEIVE ALARM

MENU ITEM GLOSSARY


Menu path: ALARM / SPU ALARM / PU ALARM / RECEIVE ALARM

(FOR SW V9.6.5)
Menu path: ALARM / ODU ALARM / ODU ALARM A(B) /
RECEIVE ALARM
Explanation: Appears when there is a fault in the receive section of the SPU
/ PU / ODU.
Action: Replace the specified unit.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


C-20 MENU ITEM GLOSSARY (FOR SW V9.6.5)

RECEIVE OOF
Menu path: ALARM / TRIBUTARY ALARM / TRIBUTARY n ALARM /
RECEIVE OOF
Explanation: Appears only in the case of a DS3 radio. This indicates that the
tributary receive signal reported by the AIS detector is out of
frame.
Action: Set the proper insertion mode for the tributary receive signal,
that is AIS insertion for a FRAMED configuration, and All 1’s
for an UNFRAMED configuration.

REMOTE [ENABLE / DISABLE]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / NET_COMM / REMOTE
Explanation: Allows the user to ENABLE / DISABLE the NetComm
protocol support over the East port interconnection through
the RF Link. Disabling NetComm on the East port also
disables the remote alarms and the Link ID. This
configuration point must be enabled, if you are to use
the HHT with a remote radio.

REMOTE ALARM
Menu path: ALARM / REMOTE ALARM
Explanation: Leads to submenus that allow the operator to view alarms
resulting from a problem at the remote coordinating site.
Action: Enter submenu.

REMOTE COMM FAIL


Menu path: ALARM / REMOTE ALARM / REMOTE COMM FAIL
Explanation: The local microwave radio has lost the communication link
with the remote coordinating microwave radio site.
Action: Check the operation of the equipment at the remote
coordinating site.

REMOTE SYNC LOSS


Menu path: ALARM / REMOTE ALARM / REMOTE SYNCH LOSS
Explanation: The muldex at the remote coordinating radio has lost
synchronization with the signal from the local radio.
Action: Troubleshoot the local radio; then, if necessary troubleshoot
the remote coordinating radio.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


C-21

ROUTING TABLE
Menu path: STATUS / IP ROUTING STATUS / ROUTING TABLE
Explanation: Displays a summary of the IP routing table the MicroStar®
actually uses. Parameters displayed are as follows:
• destination address/mask
ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd/mm
• router address rrr.rrr.rrr.rrr
• interface name iiiiiii
• routing protocol used ppppppp

RPTR IN [ENABLE / DISABLE]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / NET_COMM / RPTR IN
Explanation: Allows the user to ENABLE / DISABLE the RPTR IN port
(WEST) for interconnecting 2 radios on the same network
through an RJ-45 cable. This connection is part of a
Net_Comm network.
Action: Disable this port when creating a loop in the NetComm
network topology.

RPTR OUT [ENABLE / DISABLE]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / NET_COMM / RPTR OUT
Explanation: Allows the user to ENABLE / DISABLE the RPTR OUT port
(SPUR) for interconnecting 2 radios on the same network
through an RJ-45 cable. This connection is part of a
Net_Comm network.
Action: Disable this port when creating a loop in the NetComm
network topology.

MENU ITEM GLOSSARY


RSL A(B) [XXXdBm]

(FOR SW V9.6.5)
Menu path: STATUS / SYSTEM STATUS / RSL A(B)
Explanation: Displays the current receive signal level for each channel in a
protected system.

RSL LOW
Menu path: ALARM / RX TRAFFIC ALARM / RSL LOW
Explanation: Alarm raised when the receive signal level is less than the set
value (at the transceiver output) that is given according to
capacity, modulation and type of radio.
Action: Increase the antenna diameter, increase the transmit power
output at the coordinating remote site, or shorten the length of
the microwave hop. (See the explanation on setting the value
for this parameter in the entry RSL LOW SEVERITY).

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


C-22 MENU ITEM GLOSSARY (FOR SW V9.6.5)

RSL LOW SEVERITY [ALARM / STATUS]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / RSL LOW SEVERITY
Explanation: This IDU configuration control point can be configured as
“alarm” or “status” values. When configured as “alarm”, the
alarm value is set; hence an alarm is raised if such a condition
occurs. When configured as “status”, the alarm is cleared, i.e.
no alarm is raised, but an RSL LOW condition displays as
Status. The default value for this configuration point is
“status”.

RSL STATUS A(B) [OK / LOW]


Menu path: STATUS / SYSTEM STATUS / RSL STATUS A(B)
Explanation: Displays the current RSL status (receive signal level). Status
would indicate a LOW value (if the signal is less than the set
value at the transceiver output).
Action: Increase the antenna diameter, increase the transmit power
output at the coordinating remote site, or shorten the length of
the microwave hop. (See the explanation on setting the value
for this parameter in the entry RSL LOW SEVERITY).

RW COMMUNITY
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET / SNMP /
NOTIFIED NMS / RW COMMUNITY
Explanation: Enter the name of the SNMP read/write community. This
name must be used in set requests to the SNMP MIB. The
default is “PUBLIC”.

RX A(B) [XXXXXXXX kHZ]


Menu path: STATUS / SYSTEM STATUS / RX A(B)
Explanation: Displays the frequency of the receive signal.

RX FREQ SET (kHz) [XXXXXX]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / ODU A (B) / RX FREQ SET
Explanation: This sets the receive frequency.

RX MN A(B)
[XXXXXXXX kHZ]
Menu path: STATUS / SYSTEM STATUS / RX MN A(B)
Explanation: Displays the minimum value of the receive signal’s frequency.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


C-23

RX MX A(B)
[XXXXXXXX kHZ]
Menu path: STATUS / SYSTEM STATUS / RX MX A(B)
Explanation: Displays the maximum value of the receive signal’s frequency.

RX STEP A(B)
[XXXX kHZ]
Menu path: STATUS / SYSTEM STATUS / RX STEP A(B)
Explanation: Displays the incremental value set for the receive signal’s
frequency.

RX TRAFFIC ALARM
Menu path: ALARM / RX TRAFFIC ALARM
Explanation: Leads to submenus.

SERVICE CHANNEL
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / PCMCIA / SERVICE CHANNEL
Explanation: Leads to a menu for setting the service channel characteristics.

SES [XXXXXXX]
Menu path: PERFORMANCE / G.826 / SES
Explanation: Displays number of severely errored seconds, as defined in
ITU-T Recommendation G.826, since the RST (reset) option
was last selected in any of the G.826 branch menus.

SHUT DOWN REASON [SW UPGR / FW UPGR / RESET]


Menu path: SHUT DOWN / SHUT DOWN REASON

MENU ITEM GLOSSARY


Explanation: Allows the operator to specify the type of shut down that will

(FOR SW V9.6.5)
occur when the SHUT DOWN DELAY times out. The
possibilities are software upgrade, firmware upgrade, or reset.
A software upgrade will interchange the alternate and the
active software, then reset the system. A firmware upgrade will
copy firmware from the alternate software location into flash
memory and field programable devices, then reset the system.
Reset simply resets the system.

SHUT DOWN DELAY [XXXXX]


Menu path: SHUT DOWN / SHUT DOWN DELAY
Explanation: Specifies a counter value in seconds and starts a countdown.
When the counter reaches zero, the system shuts down in the
manner specified by SHUT DOWN REASON.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


C-24 MENU ITEM GLOSSARY (FOR SW V9.6.5)

SESR [XX.XXXXX%]
Menu path: PERFORMANCE / G.826 / SESR
Explanation: Displays the severely errored second ratio, as defined in ITU-
T Recommendation G.826, calculated from the time the RST
(reset) option was last selected in any of the G.826 branch
menus.

SN [XXXXXXXX]
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / SPU / SN
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / ODU A(B) / SN
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / HPA A(B) / SN
Explanation: Gives the Harris serial number of the module or unit.

SNMP
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET / SNMP
Explanation: A submenu that allows setting of various configuration
parameters for SNMP.

SOFTWARE ALARM
Menu path: ALARM / SOFTWARE ALARM
Explanation: Leads to submenus.

SOFTWARE CORRUPTED
Menu path: ALARM / ODU ALARM / ODU ALARM A(B) /
SOFTWARE CORRUPTED
Explanation: Appears if the controller module detects corrupted software in
the ODU. See Automatic Inter-Unit Software Download on
page 4-31.
Action: Replace the ODU to clear the alarm.

SPEED [1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / DATA PORT / SPEED
Explanation: Sets the data transmission’s baud rate for the DATA port. The
default value for this configuration point is 19200 baud.

SPU
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / SPU
Explanation: Leads to submenus.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


C-25

SPU ALARM
Menu path: ALARM / IDU ALARM / SPU ALARM
Explanation: Indicates a failure in the SPU. See further items in this menu.

SPU GENERAL FAILURE


Menu path: ALARM / IDU ALARM / SPU ALARM /
SPU GENERAL FAILURE
Explanation: Occurs when the FPGA on the SPU cannot be loaded.
Action: Download latest version of software. If problem persists,
replace the SPU.

STATIC ROUTES
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET / STATIC ROUTES
Explanation: Leads to the IP static routes configuration menu.

STATIC RTE n DEST [XXX.XXX.XXX/mm]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET / STATIC ROUTES
/ STATIC RTE n DEST
Explanation: This sets the destination IP address and sub-net mask of each
of the configured static routes.

STATIC RTE n ROUTER [XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET / STATIC ROUTES
/ STATIC RTE n ROUTER
Explanation: This sets the router’s IP address of each of the configured static
routes.

MENU ITEM GLOSSARY


STATUS

(FOR SW V9.6.5)
Menu path: STATUS
Explanation: Leads to submenus that allow the operator to view the status
functions.

S/W INCOMPATIBLE
Menu path: ALARM / SOFTWARE ALARM / ODU A (B) ALARM /
S/W INCOMPATIBLE
Explanation: Appears if the version number of the software in the ODU is
not the same as the version number of the software in the
controller module. See Automatic Inter-Unit Software
Download on page 4-31.
Action: Replace the ODU to clear the alarm.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


C-26 MENU ITEM GLOSSARY (FOR SW V9.6.5)

S/W VER [XXXX] OR [XXXXXXXXXXX]


Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / SPU / SW VER
Menu path: STATUS / INVENTORY / ODU A(B) / SW VER
Explanation: Gives version number of software currently in the specified
unit.

SYNC LOSS
Menu path: ALARM / RX TRAFFIC ALARM / SYNC LOSS
Explanation: Indicates that the SPU is in synchronization loss.
Action: Replace the SPU.

SYNC LOSS
Menu path: PERFORMANCE / BER / SYNC LOSS
Explanation: Appears during a loss of synchronization.

SYNC LOSS OCCURRED


Menu path: PERFORMANCE / BER / SYNC LOSS OCCURRED
Explanation: Appears when a synchronization loss has occurred since the
RST option was last selected on any of the performance
menus.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Menu path: MAIN MENU
Explanation: Displays the system description string.

SYSTEM STATUS
Menu path: STATUS / SYSTEM STATUS
Explanation: Leads to submenus giving various parameters measured or set
in the microwave radio.

T1 TRIBUTARY CODES
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / T1 TRIBUTARY CODES
Explanation: Sub-menu available ONLY if the value of TRIBUTARY CODE
is set to PER TRIB. Allows for setting the 'tributary t1-n [ami
/ b8zs]' values.

TEMP A(B) [XXXC / F]


Menu path: STATUS / SYSTEM STATUS / TEMP A (B)
Explanation: Displays the internal temperature of the ODU.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


C-27

TRANSMIT ALARM
Menu path: ALARM / SPU ALARM / SPU ALARM / TRANSMIT ALARM
Menu path: ALARM / SPU ALARM / PU ALARM / TRANSMIT ALARM
Menu path: ALARM / ODU ALARM / ODU ALARM A(B) / TRANSMIT
ALARM
Explanation: Appears when there is a fault in the transmitter section of the
SPU / PU / ODU.
Action: Replace the unit.

TRANSMIT OOF
Menu path: ALARM / TRIBUTARY ALARM / TRIBUTARY n ALARM /
TRANSMIT OOF
Explanation: Appears only in the case of a DS3 radio. This indicates that the
tributary transmit signal reported by the AIS detector is out of
frame.
Action: Set the proper insertion mode for the tributary transmit signal,
that is AIS insertion for a FRAMED configuration, and All 1’s
for an UNFRAMED configuration.

TRIB n EQUAL [0-133’ / 133-266’ / 266-399’ / 399-533’ / 533-655’]

Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / TRIBUTARY EQUAL / TRIB 1


EQUAL
Explanation: Selects line equalization for tributary n on the muldex unit by
selecting the length of the tributary line. Applies only to North
American DS1 bit-rates.

MENU ITEM GLOSSARY


TRIB LPBK n

(FOR SW V9.6.5)
[SET / CLR]
Menu path: STATUS / CONTROL STATUS / IDU /
TRIB LOOPBACK / TRIB LPBK n
Explanation: Shows the current status of the remote loopback functions on
the individual tributaries. SET indicates that the local radio is
in tributary loopback.

TRIB LPBK n
[SET / CLR]
Menu path: CONTROL / IDU / TRIB LOOPBACK / TRIB LPBK n
Explanation: Select SET to have the local site loopback the demultiplexer
output into multiplexer input on the tributary n data stream.
Explanation: See Loopback on page 4-30.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


C-28 MENU ITEM GLOSSARY (FOR SW V9.6.5)

TRIB LOOPBACK
Menu path: CONTROL / IDU / TRIB LOOPBACK
Explanation: Leads to a submenu for setting or clearing a loopback on a
given tributary.

TRIB T3 MODE [FRAMED / UNFRAMED]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / TRIB T3 MODE
Explanation: Sets the framing status of the T3 mode.

TRIBUTARY
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / TRIBUTARY
Explanation: Leads to submenu to enable or disable tributaries

TRIBUTARY ALARM
Menu path: ALARM
Menu path: ALARM / TRIBUTARY ALARM
Explanation: Appears if one of the tributaries fails. Leads to submenu.
Action: Enter submenu.

TRIBUTARY CODE [AMI / HDB3 / B8ZS / B3ZS / PER TRIB]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / TRIBUTARY CODE
Explanation: Submenu allowing the operator to set the code for a given
tributary.

TRIBUTARY EQUAL
Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / TRIBUTARY EQUAL
Explanation: Submenu allowing the operator to set the equalization value
for a given tributary.

TRIBUTARY n [ENABLE / DISABLE]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / TRIBUTARY / TRIBUTARY n
Explanation: Allows the operator to disable tributaries that are not being
used. Available on all SPUs except on DS3 SPUs.

TRIBUTARY n ALARM
Menu path: ALARM / TRIBUTARY ALARM / TRIBUTARY n ALARM
Explanation: Indicates the failure of a specific tributary. Leads to a
submenu. (Applies to all SPUs except for T3).
Action: Enter submenu.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


C-29

TRIBUTARY T1-n [AMI / B8ZS]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / T1 TRIBUTARY CODES /
TRIBUTARY T1-N
Explanation: Allows for selecting the codes corresponding to the T1 (1-to-16)
tributaries.

TX A(B) [XXXXXXXX kHz]


Menu path: STATUS / SYSTEM STATUS / TX A(B)
Explanation: Displays the transmit signal’s frequency.

TX A(B) [ONLINE / OFFLINE]


Menu path: STATUS / EQUIPMENT ONLINE / TX A(B)
Explanation: Indicates which transmitter is currently selected to pass traffic
or OFFLINE. In FD and FD/SD protection schemes, ONLINE
for TX A and ONLINE for TX B are both displayed at the same
time.

TX ATTEN (dB) [XX]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / ODU A (B) / TX ATTEN
Explanation: This sets the transmit attenuation in designated steps.

TX FREQ SET (kHz) [XXXXXX]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / ODU A (B) / TX FREQ SET
Explanation: This sets the transmit frequency.

TX MN A(B)
[XXXXXXXX kHz]

MENU ITEM GLOSSARY


Menu path: STATUS / SYSTEM STATUS / TX MN A(B)

(FOR SW V9.6.5)
Explanation: Displays the minimum value of the transmit signal’s
frequency.

TX MX A(B)
[XXXXXXXX kHz]
Menu path: STATUS / SYSTEM STATUS / TX MX A(B)
Explanation: Displays the maximum value of the transmit signal’s
frequency.

TX STEP A(B)
[XXXX kHz]
Menu path: STATUS / SYSTEM STATUS / TX STEP A(B)
Explanation: Displays the incremental value set for the transmit signal’s
frequency.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


C-30 MENU ITEM GLOSSARY (FOR SW V9.6.5)

UNAV [XXXXXX]
Menu path: PERFORMANCE / G.826 / UNAV
Explanation: Displays the amount of time that the signal was unavailable, as
defined by ITU-T G.826, since the RST option in any of the
G.826 menus was last selected.

UNAVR [XX.XXXXX%]
Menu path: PERFORMANCE / G.826 / UNAVR
Explanation: Displays the ratio of time that the signal was unavailable, as
defined by ITU-T G.826, since the RST option in any of the
G.826 menus was last selected.

WRITE PERMISSION [ALLOWED / DENIED]


Menu path: CONFIGURATION / IDU / INTERNET / SNMP /
NOTIFIED NMS / WRITE PERMISSION
Explanation: This item is a master override control to allow or disallow write
access to the SNMP MIB.
Action:

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


D
A P P E N D I X

APPLICATION NOTES

Typical Terminal Configurations

Figure D-1 shows a typical MicroStar® terminal. Here, 16 balanced E1 signals


are connected between the TRIBUTARIES connector on the radio’s faceplate
and the user’s distribution frame. In addition, a computer running the
FarScan™ software, or SNMP/FTP/IP software can be connected to the
PCMCIA serial port or the 10BASE-T/NMS port, respectively. With such
software the operator can monitor and control MicroStar® radios and other
Harris equipment throughout the network. The telephone connected to the 4W
connector allows the operator to have voice communications with other sites in
the network.
Figure D-1: Typical Terminal Block Diagram

ODU

APPLICATION NOTES
Customer’s
Distribution
SPU Frame

Data PCMCIA 10BASE-T Tributaries

16 X E1 or
16 X T1

PC running
FarScan™

PC running Web-CIT
(SNMP, FTP or any IP)

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


D-2 APPLICATION NOTES

MicroStar ® Repeater
Figure D-2 shows a typical repeater configuration. Here E1 tributaries are
connected between header connectors on two back to back radios by means of
cross connect equipment supplied by the customer or an OEM. The cross
connect equipment, a DACCS, back to back channel banks, etc., allows
channels to be dropped and inserted. The line between the RPTR connectors
connect orderwire, data channel, and network control signals between the
radios.
Figure D-2: Typical Repeater Block Diagram

Insert Drop
MicroStar® Digital Radio MicroStar® Digital Radio
West Direction East Direction
Customer’s
Cross Connect
16 x E1 16 x E1
Equipment
RFU SPU SPU RFU
DACCS,
Channel Banks, ETC.

RPTR (OUT) RPTR (IN)


Network/Protection Cable
See table 6-1 for part
numbers and length options.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Typical Terminal Configurations D-3

Typical Repeater with Spur


Figure D-3 shows three MicroStar® radios connected in as a repeater with a
spur. A DACCS, back to back channel banks or other cross connect equipment
connects the tributaries between the radios and drops and inserts signals.
Harris does not manufacture cross connect equipment; however, we can buy it
for the customer from a third party if requested.
The telephone and optional orderwire card provide voice communications
with other sites in the network. If intelligent cross-connect equipment is used,
it can be controlled by means of the data channel on the DATA port.
Figure D-3: Typical Repeater with Spur Block Diagram

Microstar® Digital Radio Insert Drop Microstar® Digital Radio


West Direction East Direction
Cross Connect
16 X E1 Equipment 16 X E1
RFU SPU Daccs, SPU RFU
Channel Banks,
Etc.

RPTR RPTR
(OUT) (IN)

RPTR
(OUT)
16 X E1

RPTR
(IN)
SPU

APPLICATION NOTES
RFU

Microstar® Digital Radio


Spur Direction

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


D-4 APPLICATION NOTES

Control and Monitoring

Figure D-4 shows the connections that can be made to control and monitor
equipment.
Alarm information on the dry contact relays can be connected to the user’s
signalling or alarm monitoring equipment. For example they could be
connected to an external RTU communicating with a remote operator via the
data channel.
The TERMINAL connector allows a VT-100 terminal, a hand held terminal, or
computer to control and monitor this and other MicroStar® radios in the
network.
The DATA port connects a terminal to the data channel, which can be used in
conjunction with third party RTUs for network management.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Control and Monitoring D-5

Figure D-4: MicroStar® Radio Monitoring and Control,


Block Diagram
Microstar® Radio
West Direction

ODU

SPU

ALARMS/
DATA TERMINAL PCMCIA 10BASE-T/NMS RELAYS

Alarm

60VDC,
300 mA Max.

User’s Alarm Equipment:


Bells Whistles or RTU

Network Management
through the Web-CIT
(SNMP, FTP or any IP)

APPLICATION NOTES

VT-100 Or Hand Held Terminal,

FARSCAN™
Computer

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


D-6 APPLICATION NOTES

Using SNMP to Control your Network


To take advantage of the SNMP agent in the MicroStar® radio, you must have
a network management system (such as the StarView™ system or Web-CIT
from Harris) that supports the SNMP application protocol along with the
UDP/IP transport, addressing and routing protocols.
Figure D-5 shows a simple application. In this example, the control software
communicates with one MicroStar® radio by means of a direct connection.
That radio becomes the router for a sub-network that consists of the other
MicroStar® radios.
Figure D-5: Controlling the Network Through a Direct
Connection

10BASE-T

CENTRAL OFFICE
COMPUTER
RUNNING
NETWORK
CONTROL
SOFTWARE

In internet terminology the computer running the control software is referred


to as the NMS (network manager system) and the MicroStar® radios are
referred to as NEs (network elements). There are two data link layers: the link
between the NMS and the NEs (over the LAN), referred to as the Ethernet link
layer; and the link between the NEs (over the MicroStar® , internal network
channel), referred to as the net link layer. The later is also referred to as the
local sub-network). Each NE has an IP address and a mask which can be set by
the user.
Figure D-6 shows a more complicated network where the NMS connects to
several sub-networks by means of a LAN.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Control and Monitoring D-7

Figure D-6: A System Using Sub-Nets

Central Office
Radio 1 Radio 2

MicroStar® MicroStar®
Network
Control
Software

SUB-NET 1
ETHERNET
HUB
Radio 3

ETHERNET
SUB-NET MicroStar® MicroStar®

SUB-NET 2

MicroStar® MicroStar® MicroStar®

SUB-NET 3

The following configurations represent the three different roles of a radio in a


MicroStar® network from the point of view of network management using
SNMP capabilities.
Radio 1 is the router in the Sub-net 1 and Ethernet Subnet, and is directly

APPLICATION NOTES
linked to the terminal server at the Central Office:

CONFIGURATION ⇒ IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒


INTNET IP ADR/MSK 198.105.16.41/29
INTERFACES ⇒
CONFIGURATION ⇒ IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒ NMS IP ADRS 198.105.20.32
SNMP ⇒ ALT NMS IP ADRS 198.105.20.33
CONFIGURATION ⇒ IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒
IP ADDRESS/MASK 198.105.20.44/24
INTERFACES ⇒ ETHERNET ⇒

Note that the INTNET sub-net is 198.105.16.40/29 and that the


ETHERNET IP ADDRESS does not belong to this sub-net.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


D-8 APPLICATION NOTES

Radio 2 plays an ordinary role in the network and has a simple configuration:

CONFIGURATION ⇒ IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒


INTNET IP ADR/MSK 198.105.16.42/29
INTERFACES ⇒
CONFIGURATION ⇒ IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒ NMS IP ADRS 198.105.20.32
SNMP ⇒ ALT NMS IP ADRS 198.105.20.33

Finally, Radio 3 is the router in the Sub-net 2 and Ethernet Subnet, but
it’s connected to the Central Office through an Ethernet Hub:

CONFIGURATION ⇒ IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒ 198.105.16.49/29


INTNET IP ADR/MSK
INTERFACES ⇒ 255.255.255.248
CONFIGURATION ⇒ IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒ NMS IP ADRS 198.105.20.32
SNMP ⇒ ALT NMS IP ADRS 198.105.20.33
CONFIGURATION ⇒ IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒
IP ADDRESS/MASK 198.105.20.67/24
INTERFACES ⇒ ETHERNET ⇒

Again, note that the INTNET sub-net is 198.105.16.48/29 and that the
ETHERNET IP ADDRESS does not belong to this sub-net.

The DHCP Server


Also, we offer a DHCP server feature that allows the direct connection of a PC
to a MicroStar® radio. The PC must be configured to get its IP address through
a DHCP server. The CONFIGURATION ⇒ IDU ⇒ INTERNET ⇒ INTERFACES
⇒ETHERNET ⇒ DHCP PEER IP ADDR.
is the IP address that the MicroStar® will lease to the PC for the duration of the
connection. Thus, the Ethernet Interface IP address must be configured to be
in a sub-net other than that of the Intnet Sub-net. The Ethernet Interface IP
address and the leased DHCP address must be in the same sub-net.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Surge Protection Information D-9

Surge Protection Information

Introduction
This sub-section provides information regarding surge protection methods for
microwave radio equipment sites. These methods will help to minimize
damage to the equipment.

Surge Protection Overview

Primary Protection
Primary protection methods are those installation features which comprise the
first line of defense against surges. Primary protection techniques address such
things as tower and external waveguide grounding, external grounding ring bus
and interior ring bus. In all cases, the overall intent is the successful divergence
of extremely high surge currents to earth ground rather than into
telecommunications equipment located within the facility.

Secondary Protection
Some voltage and current surge will enter the facility regardless of the extent of
external countermeasures. Therefore, it is advisable to equip the radio
equipment with secondary protection devices. These devices are voltage clamps
that will divert the surge current to earth ground.
Secondary protection methods are described in detail in this document. A
connector summary table at the end of this document that lists the
characteristics of the various I/Os (input/output connections) which may be
vulnerable to surge damage at a site. In some cases there may be more than a
single installation, since more than one device is qualified for a particular I/O

APPLICATION NOTES
port.

Surge Protection Devices


Because surges external to the facility can exceed one million volts and one
hundred thousand Amperes, proper primary protection methods must be
present. Secondary protection devices are typically only rated to several
thousand volts. Hence they cannot be used as a substitute for primary
protection.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


D-10 APPLICATION NOTES

Naturally occurring surges are unavoidable. When they occur most of the
energy must be diverted to ground. Secondary protection devices must be
connected to earth ground with as low a path impedance as possible. Ideally,
the devices can be mounted directly on the “hatch plate” (waveguide wall access
plate) which should offer a low impedance to earth ground.
If an individual grounding wire must be used, 6-gauge wire is sufficient but it
must be kept extremely short to be effective. The reason the wire length is so
critical is due to its inductance. A one meter length of wire has an inductance of
roughly one microHenry.
The rise time of a typical current surge is on the order of several thousand
Amperes per microsecond. If the following equation is considered:
VL= L di/dt
(where “di/dt” is the rate of current change with respect to time).
The voltage developed across a one-meter piece of wire will be large.
Example: Let L= 1 microHenry and di/dt=2500 Amperes per microsecond.
Then,
VL=(1x10e-6)x(2500/1x10e-6) = 2500 Volts.
This means that the protection device chassis ground will rise above station
ground by 2500 Volts. The I/O port it is meant to protect will rise 2500 Volts
above station ground rendering the protection device useless. It is critical that
the protection device ground connection have as low an inductance as possible.
The inductance of the wire running from the protection device to the I/O port
provides additional isolation for the I/O port. We suggest taking advantage of
this. Mounting the devices several feet away from the I/O port actually
improves the level of protection.
There are two key concepts to secondary protection. First, the protection device
is a voltage clamp which will divert most of the current to earth ground as long
as the device’s ground connection is made with minimal inductance. Second,
the inductance of the line running from the protection device to the I/O port
offers additional port isolation.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Surge Protection Information D-11

Never mount the protection device directly on the


equipment rack. This will result in the diverted
current running through portions of the rack
which may damage electronic components.

Large currents running down the side of an equipment rack may generate an
electromagnetic field which will induce voltages within the equipment. The
induced voltages will cause data corruption and more likely will cause
permanent damage to electronic devices.

Primary Protection References


• Rural Electrification Administration (REA) “Section 810”, Issue 6, Sept.
1984
• AT&T “Section 802-001-197”, Issue 1, June 1973

Secondary Protection by Connector Type


This section contains a summary of the various I/O characteristics and surge
protection devices qualified for Harris Microwave Communications Division
radio products. Refer to table D-1 for the connector you wish to equip with
surge protection devices.

Connector Summary Table

APPLICATION NOTES
Table D-1: Surge Information

Surge
I/O Surge
Connect Signal Signal Device Protect Protector Manufact.
or Type Function Charact. or
Vmax Model
Vclamp
+/- 11V +/- 25V +/-
DB9 FarScan™ 095-0601L-H POLYPHASER
+/- 5V +/- 13V 12.5V

- 0.5 /
size alarms SP335A
Wirewrap TTL + 7V +/- 6.8V BLACKBOX
& controls
+/- 30V SP315A

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


D-12 APPLICATION NOTES

Table D-1: Surge Information

Surge
I/O Surge
Connect Signal Signal Protect
Device Protector Manufact.
or Type Function Charact. or
Vmax Model
Vclamp
dry contact +/-
Wirewrap +/- 60V +/- 100V 095-0608A-A POLYPHASER
indicators 100V
75 Ω +/- 30V
094-0906L-
BNC application +/- 0.85V +/- 2V POLYPHASER
+/- 5V A1
s
Batt -21 to -46
DC power +/- 75V +/- 62V IS-48VDC POLYPHASER
Wires VDC
50 pin “D” E1 output +/- 35V
+/- 3.6V +/- 7V IS-T1 POLYPHASER
50 pin “D” E1 input +/- 12V
IF and +/- 60VDC
N-type --- 90-130V P8AX-09 CITEL
telemetry 0-310 MHz

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Using Web CIT to Access a Radio with older software. D-13

Using Web CIT to Access a Radio with older


software.

If the Local Site radio and the Remote Site radio both have software version
9.6.5 or higher and the Local Site radio can make an IP connection to the
Remote Site radio, Web CIT will display information from both radios in
different areas of the content frame. In the following three situations, however
you will not be able to properly access the Remote Site screen.
• If the Local Site radio can not make an IP connection to the Remote
Site radio, you will see the error screen shown in figure D-7.
• If, the Remote Site has an earlier version of software, and the
management station has been configured to run the earlier version, the
remote site screen will appear as shown in figure D-8, but it will not
respond.
• If the management station has not been configured to accept the earlier
version, you will see the error screen shown in figure D-9.
Figure D-7: Remote Site Screen Problem, Example 3: Where
the Local Site can not make an IP connection to the
Remote Site

APPLICATION NOTES

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


D-14 APPLICATION NOTES

Figure D-8: Remote Site Screen Problem, Example 1: Where


the Management Station is configured to support Java
applets

Figure D-9: Remote Site Screen Problem, Example 2: Where


the Management Station does not support Java
applets

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Using Web CIT to Access a Radio with older software. D-15

If an IP connection cannot be established between two radios. The Remote


Site may be off or not functioning properly or there could be a path problem.
In the cases where the Remote Site has the earlier software, you have the
option of installing the new software on the remote site radio. However, if for
some reason that is not possible or practical you can still access the information
on the remote site radio by connecting directly to it if your management station
is configured to run the earlier version of Web CIT. 'Connecting to the Remote
Site Radio' below explains how to make the connection. Configuring the
Management Station to Run the earlier version of Web CIT on page D-16
explains how to configure the management station.

Connecting to the Remote Site Radio

To connect to the remote site radio, copy the Remote Site IP Address from
the Configuration & Status > IP Interfaces screen to the browser’s address
field as shown in figure D-11, then press Enter.
Figure D-10: Getting the Remote Site URL

3
172.31.112.163

APPLICATION NOTES
2

If this does not work, it maybe that your management station is not configured
to run the earlier Web CIT’s Java applets (See the section that follows).

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


D-16 APPLICATION NOTES

Configuring the Management Station to Run the


earlier version of Web CIT

The earlier Web CIT uses JAVA applets that require certificates to be executed
on the machine running the browser. Our implementation does not provide
these certificates. As a consequence the management station must be
configured at follows:
1. The Sun Java Runtime Environment must be installed on the management
station and the management station’s web browser must be configured to
run signed and unsigned contents.
2. The URLs of all the radios to be accessed must be listed in the browser’s list
of trusted sites. These URLs have the form of
“http://ip_address_of_a_MicroStar” or http://198.105.20.32
3. All permissions applicable to trusted sites must be granted.

Installing Sun’s Java Runtime Environment


Sun’s Java virtual machine is known as the JRE (Java Runtime Environment).
To run the Web CIT you must have JRE (Java Runtime Environment) version
1.4.1 or higher installed.
To verify if it is installed on your management station, open the MicroSoft IE
browser and go to its Tools > Internet Options >Advanced menu. If the
JRE is installed, the menu will have an entry similar to the one circled in
figure D-11. Make sure that the box is check marked.
If you do not have the entry, down load and install the JRE from the Sun
internet site, http://www.java.com/en/download/windows_automatic.jsp.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Using Web CIT to Access a Radio with older software. D-17

Figure D-11:

1x

Allowing Signed and Unsigned Contents


Go to the browser’s Tools > Internet Options > Security menu; then,
click on Trusted sites; then, click on Custom level.... In the Security
settings window (figure D-12), click a dot into the radio button beside the

APPLICATION NOTES
Microsoft VM > Java permissions > Custom item. Then click on the
Java Custom Settings button. In the Internet window (figure D-13 and
figure D-14), click dots into the radio buttons beside Unsigned Content >
Run Unsigned Content > Enable and Signed Content > Run
Signed Content > Enable.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


D-18 APPLICATION NOTES

Figure D-12:

Figure D-13:

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


Using Web CIT to Access a Radio with older software. D-19

Figure D-14:

Adding Radios to the List of Trusted Sites


To add a radio to the list of trusted sites, go to the browser’s Tools >
Internet Options > Security menu; then, click on Trusted sites;

APPLICATION NOTES
then, click on Sites.... In the window that appears, enter the IP address of the
radio, being sure to use the “http://” prefix: for example
“http://198.105.20.32”.

Granting all Permissions to Trusted Sites


Go to the browser’s Tools > Internet Options > Security menu; then,
click on Trusted sites; then, click on Custom level... .In the Security
settings window (figure D-12), click a dot into the radio button beside the
Microsoft VM > Java permissions > Custom item. Then click on the
Java Custom Settings button. In the Internet window (figure D-13 and
figure D-14), click dots into the radio buttons beside all Enable items.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


D-20 APPLICATION NOTES

Internet security considerations


The users should be aware that configuring the web browser to run the Web-
CIT creates a security breach when accessing the Internet due to the lowered
security settings of the trusted sites zone. For this reason, we recommend
that you reset the security levels back to their higher levels before using the
same computer to access the Internet for other uses.

In no event shall HARRIS CORPORATION, its staff


and/or partners be liable to the user for any
special, consequential, indirect or similar
damages, including any lost profits or lost data
arising out of such a security breach. The user is
solely responsible for taking all protection
measures necessary for achieving a secure
connection before, during and after the use of the
Web-CIT software.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


E
A P P E N D I X

GLOSSARY
AGC, AGC Voltage
Automatics Gain Control associated with the ODU receiver; the DC voltage
equivalent to the received RF signal level.

AIS
Alarm Indication Signal; a signal that usually indicates traffic outage.

AMI
Alternate Mark Inversion signal — a type of tributary encoding method.

ASIC
Application Specific Integrated Circuit.

ATDE
Adaptive Time Domain Equalization.

Baud Rate
The asynchronous digital transmission rate; the data rate associated with the
GLOSSARY

operation of an asynchronous data communication.

BER
Bit Error Rate.

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


E-2 GLOSSARY

BERT
A piece of test equipment that tests the bit error rate of a transmission system.

Demultiplexer
Circuitry that accepts a frequency division or time division and produces as an
output two or more separate information carrying channels.

EIA
Electronic Industry Association: a standards body.

FEC
Forward Error Correction. A data error-correction scheme that increases the
resistance of the microwave radio to interference.

CPU
Central processing unit.

CW
Continuous Wave; an unmodulated sine-wave.

DADE
Differential Absolute Delay Equalization.

Hop
The radio transmission from one microwave radio to another through the
atmosphere.

SPU
Indoor Unit; the part of the microwave radio located indoors to which the
customer connects their equipment.

Loopback
Feeding back a transmit signal into the receive circuitry of the same microwave
radio for test purposes (level 2 loop back); or feeding back received signal into
the transmit circuitry for test purposes (level 1 loopback).

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


E-3

ODU
Outdoor Unit; the part of the microwave radio located outdoors, that connects
to the antenna.

Muldex
A circuit that combines the functions of a multiplexer and a demultiplexer.

Multiplexer
Circuitry that combines two or more information carrying channels for
transmission over one channel, by using frequency division or time division
techniques.

PABX
Private Automatic Branch Exchange. A local telephone switch.

PLL
Phase-Locked Loop.

PU
Protection Unit.

Receive Threshold
The sensitivity of the receiver at a given BER. It is usually expressed in dBm.

RTU
Remote Terminal Unit.

Skilled person
A skilled person is considered to have the necessary knowledge and practical
experience of electrical and radio engineering to appreciate the various hazards
GLOSSARY

that can arise from working on radio transceivers, and takes appropriate
precautions to ensure the safety of personnel.
This individual is considered to be a skilled person only if they are competent
to take responsibility for both their own safety and for that of unskilled
personnel under their immediate supervision, when working on the

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


E-4 GLOSSARY

transceiver.
Training requirements for a skilled person should not only be confined to
technical matters and, preferably, should include first-aid treatment, especially
methods of artificial resuscitation: respiration and cardiac compression (heart
massage).

SPU
Signal Processing Unit.

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004


I
A P P E N D I X

INDEX
A F
AIS 2-25 Firmware
alarm menu B-3 remote site upgrade 4-41
altitude 2-39 framing loss 2-25
frequency
B bands 2-21
BER, verification 3-45 spacing 2-22
bit rate front access feature 2-17
tributary 2-25
H
C hand-held terminal 4-23
cable, coaxial 2-18 Humidity 2-39
Capacity humidity, operating 2-38
bandwidth allocation 2-22
bit rate 2-26 I
designations 1-11 intermediate frequency 2-25
fade margin 2-31 Inter-Unit Software Download 4-31
tributary transmit time 2-27 ISO 9001 -vii, 2-37
coaxial cable 2-18
composite signal coaxial cable J
maximum length 2-18 Java2 download 4-34
configuration menu B-6
configuration password 4-28 L
control menu B-5 lightning 2-36
control password 4-28 line code 2-25
curves 2-34 Line interface specifications 2-25
long count 3-45
D Loopback
dimensions, mechanical 2-19 Mux-to-Demux 4-30
Tributary 4-30
E
earthquake shock resistance 2-38 M
EMI 2-36 master password 4-28
exchange 6-25 microphonics 2-39
MTTR 2-36
INDEX

N
network channel connections 3-34
Notes and Warnings 2-1

Harris Corporation MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU


I-2 INDEX

O T
output technical assistance 6-25
power 2-27 telephone 2-34
temperature range
P operating 2-38
parts ordering 6-2 storage 2-38
Passwords 4-27 Theory of operation 2-6
performance menu B-5 threshold
polarization of the antenna 3-5 receive 2-29
power threshold to interference 2-24
consumption 2-35 training 6-31
power consumption 2-35 transit shock 2-38
transmit power 2-27
Q transmit spectrum curves 2-24
quality standard 2-37 transmit to receive frequency spacing 2-22
tributary bit rate 2-25
R
radio spectrum bandwidth 2-22 U
receive threshold 2-29 upgrade
remote site remote site
firmware upgrade 4-41 firmware 4-41
Remote Time-Out 4-32 Upgrade Utility 4-37
repair 6-25 Upgrading
replacement parts ordering 6-2 LAN-Enabled Systems 4-49
re-synchronization time 2-26
RPTR connector 3-34 V
Vibration 2-38
S vibration insensitivity 2-38
service channel interface 2-34 VT-100 terminal 4-23
Setting Frequencies 4-32
transmit frequency 3-42 W
shock 2-38 warranty 6-20
software
Sun Java2 Runtime Environment 4-34
spare 6-2
standards 2-40
status menu B-4
Switching
automatic C-10
non-revertive C-10

MicroStar® 7/8/13/15/18 GHz, Type-II IDU May 2004

Вам также может понравиться